You are on page 1of 268

Te c h n i c a l R e f e r e n c e M a n u a l

4817A
Version 2.0
M AY 2 0 0 0
MANUAL HISTORY
Date of issue for original version and subsequent versions:
NOTE: If entries are shown in bold
4817, Version 1.0 ............................ May 1993 Italics on this page, they represent new
4817, Version 2.0 ............................ January 1994 page(s) found in this latest version.
4817, Version 3.0 ............................ October 1997
4817, Version 4.0 ............................ December 1998 Previous version numbers are contained
4817A, Version 1.0 .......................... August 1999 within this latest version printing. Use
4817A, Version 2.0 ........................ May 2000 this Manual History page as a guide.

Page Version Page Version Page Version


No. No. No. No. No. No.
Cover ..................... 2.0 3-4 — 3-11 ............ 1.0 6-2 — 6-4 .............. 1.0

History Pages ........ 2.0 3-12 — 3-27 .......... 2.0 6-5 — 6-7 .............. 2.0

i — viii .................... 2.0 3-28 ..................... 2.0 6-8 ..................... 1.0

1-1 – 1-7 ................ 2.0 4-1 — 4-6 .............. 1.0 7-1 — 7-30 ............ 2.0

1-8 – 1-10 .............. 1.0 4-7— 4-8 ............... 2.0 7-31 — 7-36 .......... 2.0

1-11 – 1-19 ............ 2.0 4-9 ..................... 1.0 8-1 — 8-27 ............ 2.0

1-20 – 1-29 ............ 2.0 4-10 ..................... 2.0 8-28 — 8-30 .......... 2.0

2-1 — 2-4 .............. 1.0 4-11 — 4-33 .......... 1.0 9-1 — 9-13 ............ 2.0

2-5 ..................... 2.0 4-34 — 4-35 .......... 2.0 9-14 ..................... 2.0

2-6 — 2-10 ............ 1.0 4-36 — 4-41 .......... 1.0 10-1 — 10-4 .......... 2.0

2-11 ..................... 2.0 5-1 ..................... 2.0 11-1 — 11-10 ........ 1.0

2-12 — 2-20 .......... 1.0 5-2 — 5-13 ............ 1.0 11-11 ..................... 2.0

3-1 — 3-3 .............. 2.0 5-14 — 5-15 .......... 2.0 11-2 ..................... 1.0

6-1 ..................... 2.0 Index-1 – Index-9 ... 2.0

Copyright © 1999 Tokheim Corporation. All rights reserved.


The information contained in this manual is copyrighted by
Tokheim Corporation and is for the exclusive use of Tokheim’s
Authorized Service Representatives, Distributors, and customers,
who are authorized to make copies for use in their business. No
part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form
by any other person or persons without written permission of
Tokheim Corporation.
Trademarks:
INSIGHT™ is a trademark of Tokheim Corporation. MaxVac® is
a registered trademark of Tokheim Corporation
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
SOFTWARE HISTORY

Premier B
Dispenser and Dispenser Payment Terminal (DPT) Software Version Numbers
Manual
Version Standard Standard
Blender Model Standard INSIGHT
Number Dispenser Co-Processor
DPT with DPT with
426B-WK DPT DPT
TDS TDS Plus

1.0 JN.04.01.01+

2.0 JN.02.12.00+

3.0 JN.04.11.00 FG.02.05.00

QM.01.00.00+ QL.01.00.00+
4.0 (see note below) (see note below)
QA.04.11.00+ JP.02.18.00+ MT.QD.01.00+ MT.03.00.00+ MT.PQ.03.00+

4817A QM.01.00.00+ QL.01.00.00+


QA.04.11.00+ JP.02.18.00+ MT.QD.01.00+ MT.03.00.00+ MT.PQ.05.00+
1.0 (see note below) (see note below)

4817A QM.01.00.00+ QL.01.00.00+


QA.04.11.00+ JP.02.18.00+ MT.QD.02.00+ MT.03.01.00+ MT.PQ.05.00+
2.0 (see note below) (see note below)

IMPORTANT NOTE - BLENDER DISPENSERS ONLY!


Software versions QL.01.00.00 (Blender Co-Processor ) and QM.01.00.00 (Dispenser)
must be installed together. Otherwise, error 20s will occur.

Premier C
Dispenser and Dispenser Payment Terminal (DPT) Software Version
Manual Numbers
Version
Standard Standard
Number Blender Standard INSIGHT
Dispenser Co-Processor
DPT with DPT with
DPT DPT
TDS TDS Plus

4817A
QQ.01.00.00+ QL.01.00.00+ JP.02.18.00+ MT.QD.01.00+ MT.03.00.00+ MT.PQ.05.00+
1.0

4817A QQ.02.01.00+ QL.01.00.00+


JP.02.18.00+ MT.QD.01.00+ MT.03.01.00+ MT.PQ.05.00+
2.0 (see note below) (see note below)

IMPORTANT NOTE - BLENDER DISPENSERS ONLY!


Software versions QQ.02.01.00 (Dispenser) and QL.01.00.00 (Blender Co-Processor) must be
installed together. Otherwise, error 20s will occur.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
CONTENTS
Section 1: Introduction
Document-on-Demand ..................................................................... 1-2
Related Documents ......................................................................... 1-2
Premier Specifications .................................................................... 1-3
Premier B & C Dispenser Features ................................................. 1-6
Premier B Model Number Notation .................................................. 1-8
Premier C Model Number Notation ................................................ 1-11
Premier B Dispenser Identification ................................................ 1-14
Premier C Dispenser Identification ................................................ 1-16
Operational Diagrams (Premier B & C) .......................................... 1-20
Transverse Dispenser Configurations (Premier C) .......................... 1-21
Operational Diagrams (Premier C Transverse) ............................... 1-22
Electronic Blend Valve Operation (Premier B & C) ........................ 1-26
System Overview ........................................................................... 1-29

Section 2: Accessing Electrical Components


Dispenser Orientation (Premier B & C) ............................................ 2-2
Premier B Components
Electronics Enclosure Components ................................................ 2-4
Accessing the Card Cage ............................................................... 2-6
Accessing the Card Cage Circuit Boards ........................................ 2-8
Accessing the DPT Controller Boards ............................................. 2-9
Accessing MaxVac Vapor Recovery Components ......................... 2-10
Accessing the Connection Box ..................................................... 2-11
Premier C Components
Electronics Enclosure Components
Premier C with Standard DPT and Cash Acceptor Options ..... 2-12
Premier C with INSIGHT DTP & TDS Options ........................ 2-14
Accessing Hardware on Premier C ................................................ 2-16
Accessing the Card Cage ............................................................. 2-17
Accessing the Card Cage Circuit Boards ...................................... 2-17
Accessing the DPT Controller Boards ........................................... 2-18
Accessing MaxVac Vapor Recovery Components ......................... 2-19
Accessing the Connection Box ..................................................... 2-20

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 i
CONTENTS

Section 3: System Circuit Boards


Common Circuit Boards for Premier B and C
Circuit Board Orientation ................................................................. 3-2
Mother Board ................................................................................... 3-3
Interface Board ............................................................................... 3-6
Expanded Computer Board .............................................................. 3-8
Multiplex Board .............................................................................. 3-10
Relay Board .................................................................................. 3-11
AC Distribution Board ................................................................... 3-13
Blend Control Board ...................................................................... 3-17
Valve Interface Board .................................................................... 3-18
Options Power Supply ................................................................... 3-19
Circuit Boards for Premier B Only
LED Board .................................................................................... 3-21
Display Board ................................................................................ 3-22
Circuit Boards for Premier C Only
Display Board ................................................................................ 3-25
Intrinsically Safe Barrier (ISB) Assembly ...................................... 3-27

Section 4: Wiring Diagrams


H426B-S Suction (Premier B) .......................................................... 4-2
H428B-S Suction (Premier B) .......................................................... 4-3
H311B/H312B/H322B/H324B-S Suction (Premier B) ....................... 4-4
Intercom Speaker Wiring (Premier B) .............................................. 4-5
Intercom Speaker Wiring (Premier C) .............................................. 4-6
Electronics Block Diagram (Premier C) ........................................... 4-7
Electronics Block Diagram (Premier B) ........................................... 4-8
H413B-R (Premier B) ...................................................................... 4-9
H426B-R (Premier B) .................................................................... 4-10
H311B/H322B/H324B-R (Premier B) .............................................. 4-11
H428B-R (Premier B) .................................................................... 4-12
H413B-REB (Premier B) ................................................................ 4-13
H426B-REB (Premier B) ................................................................ 4-14
H322B-B3/B5 (Premier B) ............................................................. 4-15
AC Distribution Board Block Diagram (Premier B) ......................... 4-16

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


ii Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
CONTENTS
Section 4: Wiring Diagrams (continued)
Premier B System Wiring Diagrams
Mother Board .......................................................................... 4-17
Pump Handles & Pulsers - H428B-S ...................................... 4-18
Pump Handles & Pulsers ........................................................ 4-19
Motors & Valves - H428B-S .................................................... 4-20
Motors & Valves ..................................................................... 4-21
Displays .................................................................................. 4-22
AC Distribution ....................................................................... 4-23
Options Power Supply ............................................................. 4-24
Premier B System Wiring Diagrams (continued)
Connection Box ...................................................................... 4-24
Dispenser Payment Terminal (DPT) ........................................ 4-25
INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal - H324B ..................... 4-26
Dispenser Payment Terminal - H426B ..................................... 4-27
INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal - H426-REB ............... 4-28
INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal - H428B-R .................. 4-29
MaxVac System Wiring Diagram for Non-Blend Dispensers .... 4-30
MaxVac System Wiring Diagram for Blending Dispensers ....... 4-31
Premier C System Wiring Diagrams
System Wiring Diagram .......................................................... 4-32
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (H300 Series) ......................... 4-33
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (H400 Series) ......................... 4-34
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (H400 Series) ......................... 4-35
Displays .................................................................................. 4-36
AC Distribution ....................................................................... 4-37
MaxVac Vapor Recovery ......................................................... 4-38
Standard DPT ......................................................................... 4-39
Debit DPT .............................................................................. 4-40
INSIGHT DPT ........................................................................ 4-41

Section 5: Diagnostic Information


Using the Manager Key and Arming Key .......................................... 5-2
Basic Programming ......................................................................... 5-3
Example of Basic Programming ...................................................... 5-4

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 iii
CONTENTS
Premier B and C Diagnostic Modes
Mode F11 – View Communications Diagnostics ........................ 5-6
Mode F96 – View Error, State, & Termination Code Histories .... 5-7
Mode F97 – Check Operator Keypads & Nozzle Boot Switches 5-10
Mode F98 – Initiate Display, DPT, & Product Selection
Keypad Diagnostics ............................................. 5-12
Mode F99 – View Software Date Code, CRC Code, and
ROM CRC Diagnostic Test .................................. 5-13
Calibrating Dispenser Meters ........................................................ 5-14
Measuring Premier Dispenser to Console Communications ........... 5-14

Section 6: Error Message Handling & Troubleshooting Tips


Logic Sequence to Dispenser Repair ............................................... 6-2
Circuit Board Signal Flow Block Diagram (Premier B) .................... 6-2
Circuit Board Signal Flow Block Diagram (Premier C) .................... 6-3
ERR 01 – ERR 09 ........................................................................... 6-4
ERR 3x – ERR 13 ........................................................................... 6-5
ERR 14 – ERR 21 ........................................................................... 6-6
ERR 22 – ERR 27 ........................................................................... 6-7
ERR 39 & ERR 49 .......................................................................... 6-8

Section 7: Premier Standard DPT


Component List for Standard DPT Assemblies (Premier B & C) ..... 7-2
Subassembly Orientation (Premier B) ............................................ 7-2
Subassembly Orientation (Premier C) ............................................ 7-3
Standard DPT Information (Premier B & C) ..................................... 7-4
Standard DPT with TDS Information (Premier B & C) ..................... 7-9
Standard DPT with TDS Plus Information (Premier B & C) ............ 7-13
DPT Diagnostics (Premier B & C) ................................................. 7-18
Troubleshooting (Standard DPT) Problems (Premier B & C) .......... 7-21
Card Reader Cleaning Procedure (Premier B & C) ........................ 7-23
Tear-Bar Printer Paper Loading (Premier B) ................................... 7-24
Changing Paper on a Standard DPT Printer (Premier C) ................ 7-26
Cash Acceptor
Lock Assemblies (Premier B & C) .......................................... 7-27
Access to the Cash Acceptor Cassette (Premier B) ............... 7-28
Removing the Cash Acceptor (Premier B) ............................... 7-28
Access to the Cash Acceptor Cassette (Premier C) ............... 7-29
Removing the Cash Acceptor (Premier C) ............................... 7-29
Dip Switches on the Cash Acceptor (Premier B & C) .............. 7-31
Card Reader Cleaning Procedure (Premier B & C) .................. 7-32
Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
iv Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
CONTENTS
Section 8: INSIGHT™ DPT
Component List for INSIGHT DPT Assemblies (Premier B & C) ..... 8-2
INSIGHT Operation in Native Mode and Graphic Mode .................... 8-2
Subassembly Orientation (Premier B) ............................................. 8-3
INSIGHT Block Diagram (Premier B & C) ....................................... 8-3
INSIGHT DPT Controller Board (Premier B & C)
LED and Test Point Locations .................................................. 8-4
Jumper and Switch Locations ................................................... 8-6
Configuring INSIGHT DPT Controller Board .............................. 8-7
INSIGHT Board Connectors ...................................................... 8-9
Graphic DPT Display Board (Premier B & C) ................................. 8-12
Keypad Keycodes (Premier B & C) ................................................ 8-13
Diagnostic Tests (Premier B & C) ................................................. 8-14
Communication Problems (Premier B & C) ................................... 8-17
DPT Display Problems (Premier B & C) ........................................ 8-18
Operational Problems (Premier B & C) .......................................... 8-20
Graphic Printer Problems (Premier B & C) .................................... 8-21
Card Reader Cleaning (Premier B & C) .......................................... 8-21
Changing Paper on a Graphic Printer (Premier B) .......................... 8-22
Clearing a Paper Jam on a Graphic Printer (Premier B) ................. 8-25
Changing Paper on an INSIGHT DPT Printer (Premier C) .............. 8-27
Clearing a Paper Jam on an INSIGHT DPT Printer (Premier C) ..... 8-28

Section 9: MaxVac® Vapor Recovery System (Premier B & C)


Underground Tank & Piping Diagram ............................................... 9-2
Nozzle / Vehicle Fill Pipe ................................................................ 9-3
MaxVac System Components ......................................................... 9-3
MaxVac System Certification Requirements .................................... 9-4
MaxVac System Tests .................................................................... 9-4
Problems at Power-Up? .................................................................. 9-5
MaxVac Error LEDs ......................................................................... 9-6
MaxVac Multiplex Board .................................................................. 9-8
MaxVac Blend Control Board ........................................................... 9-9
MaxVac Power Supply Board ......................................................... 9-10
MaxVac Motor Control Board ......................................................... 9-11
MaxVac Mini Motor Control Board .................................................. 9-13

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 v
CONTENTS
Section 10: Solenoid Valve Coil Diagnostics (Premier B & C)
Checking Coil Voltages ................................................................. 10-2
Checking Coil Resistance ............................................................. 10-3
Wiring Diagrams ........................................................................... 10-4

Section 11: Glossary

Index

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


vi Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
DISCLOSURE NOTICE
This document contains information proprietary to Tokheim Corporation. The data
contained herein, in whole or in part, may not be duplicated, used, or disclosed
outside the recipient or purchaser for any purpose other than to evaluate or operate
the equipment described within the document.

DISCLAIMER
ALTHOUGH TOKHEIM CORPORATION HAS ATTEMPTED TO COMPILE THE MATERIAL IN
THIS MANUAL WITH ACCURACY, NEITHER IT, ITS EMPLOYEES, NOR ITS AGENTS CAN
MAKE ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT
TO THE LIABILITY WITH REGARD TO THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL OR ASSUME ANY
LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF ANY INFORMATION,
APPARATUS, METHOD, OR PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN THIS MANUAL.

!!! FCC WARNING !!!


This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference
to radio communications. It has been tested and has been found to comply as a class
“A” device with Part 15, Subpart “J” of the FCC rules at date of manufacture.

IMPORTANT
THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL
FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NFPA NO. 70) AND THE
AUTOMOTIVE AND MARINE SERVICE STATION CODE (NFPA 30A).

It is the owner’s and operator’s responsibility to ensure that the proper warning signs are posted per the current
edition of NFPA 30A, Code #9-9. These include, but are not limited to,
• “STOP MOTOR”
• “NO SMOKING”
• “WARNING — IT IS UNLAWFUL AND DANGEROUS TO DISPENSE GASOLINE INTO
UNAPPROVED CONTAINERS”.

TOKHEIM DISPENSERS SHALL NOT BE USED FOR DIRECT FUELING OF AIRCRAFT


WITHOUT FILTERS, SEPARATORS, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO ENSURE
PRODUCT PURITY.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 vii
! Safety Information
The following requirements are mandatory and shall be followed when installing, using, or
working around Tokheim equipment. These hazards or unsafe practices may result in death or
severe injury to persons, or damage to equipment or property.

DANGER! FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD


Dispense In
Approved
Containers -
Dispense gasoline
and other petroleum
products into
No Smoking - Never permit No Flames - Never permit open approved containers
smoking in the dispensing area. flames in the dispensing area. that are on the ground. To prevent
Sparks and embers from burning Flames from lighters, matches, static discharge, never dispense
cigarettes or pipes can set fuels welding torches, etc. can set gasoline into a portable container
and their vapors on fire. fuels and their vapors on fire. that is in or on a vehicle, including
trucks. Always use Tokheim
approved and UL Listed hoses and
nozzles with this dispenser.

WARNING! FIRE AND ELECTRICAL HAZARD


Stop Button - The Stop Button may not shut off all
power to the dispenser. Be sure all employees are
trained how to shut off all power to the system in case
of emergency. Code #4-1.2 of the current edition of
High Voltage - To reduce the NFPA 30A requires that:
risk of electrical shock when
servicing, turn off all power to “A clearly identified and easily accessible switch(es) or circuit breaker(s) shall be
all equipment. In submersible provided at a location remote from dispensing devices, including remote pumping
pump applications, turn off systems, to shut off the power to all dispensing devices in the event of an
power to the submersible pump emergency.”
and any other dispensers which
use that submersible pump. AC Additionally, Code #9-4.5 of the current edition of NFPA 30A requires that:
power can feed back into a shut
off dispenser when dispensers “Emergency controls specified in 4-1.2 [listed above] shall be installed at a
share a common submersible location acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, but controls shall not be
pump or starter relay. more than 100 ft. (30m) from dispensers.”

WARNING! SERVICE HAZARD

Turn Power Off - Before Block Islands - Block islands so Clean Up Spills - Promptly
servicing, always turn off all no vehicle can pull up to the clean up product spills on the
power to the dispenser and dispenser being worked on. driveway. Use an absorbent
submerged pumps at the master Unauthorized people or vehicles recommended by regulatory
panel. Close any impact valve in the work area are dangerous. agencies. Dispose of absorbent
before performing any as required by regulatory
maintenance or service to the agencies.
dispenser, including the
changing of fuel filters or
strainers.
Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
viii Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Introduction

Section 1: Introduction
Manual Scope
! CAUTION This manual is written for the Tokheim Authorized Service Representative
Failure to install (ASR). It contains technical reference information for identifying
equipment or components, diagnosing problems, and maintaining Premier B & C series
parts per Tokheim dispensers.
specifications, or
maintenance by Section Scope
untrained This section provides a general introduction to the dispensers referenced in
personnel, may this manual. Refer to the documents listed on the next page for additional
void the Tokheim information for Premier B & C series dispensers.
warranty.
Section 1 Contents
Document-on-Demand ............................................................ 1-2
Related Documents ................................................................. 1-2
Premier Specifications ............................................................ 1-3
Premier B & C Dispenser Features ......................................... 1-6
Premier B Model Number Notation .......................................... 1-8
Premier C Model Number Notation ........................................ 1-11
Premier B Dispenser Identification ........................................ 1-14
Premier C Dispenser Identification ........................................ 1-16
Operational Diagrams (Premier B & C) ................................. 1-19
Transverse Dispenser Configurations (Premier C) ................ 1-21
Operational Diagrams (Premier C Transverse) ..................... 1-22
Electronic Blend Valve Operation (Premier B & C) ................ 1-26
System Overview .................................................................. 1-29

Conventions used in this Manual


“DANGER” indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
! DANGER avoided, WILL result in death or serious injury.

! WARNING
“WARNING” indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, COULD result in death orserious injury.

! CAUTION
“CAUTION” indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, MAY result in minor or moderate personal injury or property
damage.

Tips provide useful information that can make your work easier.

Notes supply information that emphasizes or supplements important points


in the text. Notes may also refer you to related information elsewhere in the
manual.
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 1-1
Introduction
Document-on-Demand
The following types of documents can be ordered and received by FAX from
Tokheim' Document-on-Demand service 24-hours-a-day, 7-days-a-week:
Dispenser Outline Drawings, Foundation Plans, Wiring Diagrams, Technical
Information, Training Information, Warranty Information, Dispenser Care
Information, CARB Requirements and more.
To access this service, dial (219) 484-1864 and follow the automated
instructions to retrieve your document. If you do not know the number of the
document you want, press 9999 and an Index of all available documents will
be faxed to you.

Related Documents

Premier B Documents
• Service Parts Manual, Form 4814A
• Installation/Wiring Manual, Form 4815A
• Programming/Operating Manual, Form 4816
These documents can be
ordered from:
Tokheim Service Parts Premier C Documents
PO Box 663 • Site Preparation Manual, Form 5869
Fremont, IN 46737 • Installation Manual, Form 5870
Phone 219-470-4710 • Programming Manual, Form 5871
Fax 888-865-4344 • User's Guide, Form 5872
• Service Parts Manual, Form 5866

Common Documents
• The ONE Manual (Care of Your Pumps), Form 1680B
• Form 4857 - MaxVac Owner’s Manual
• CARB Executive Order G-70-154
• Console Programming/Operating Manual (if applicable)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-2 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Introduction
Premier Specifications

Operating Environment (Premier B & C)


Relative humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing
Minimum Ambient Temperature: -40o F (-40o C)
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 104o F (40o C)

Power Requirements (Premier B & C)


120 VAC (+10%, -15%) 240 VAC (+10%, -15%)
60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Dispenser AC Current Requirements (maximum – Premier B)


Lights and Heater:
7.6 AMPS @ 120 VAC (all models except I724B-S4x4)
8.1 AMPS @ 120VAC (model I724B-S4x4 only)
3.8 AMPS @ 240 VAC
Dispenser Electronics:
6 AMPS @ 120 VAC
3 AMPS @ 240 VAC
Suction Motors: 3/4 hp (self-contained only)
10.0 AMPS / 120 VAC
5.0 AMPS / 240 VAC
1.5 AMPS / 380 VAC
DPT: 2.0 AMPS @ 120 VAC
MaxVac: 2.0 AMPS @ 120 VAC
Optional Spandrel Lighting:
15 AMPS @ 120VAC

Dispenser AC Current Requirements (maximum – Premier C)


Lights and Heater:
5.0 AMPS @ 120 VAC
2.5 AMPS @ 240 VAC
Dispenser Electronics:
6 AMPS @ 120 VAC
3 AMPS @ 240 VAC
Suction Motors: 3/4 hp (self-contained only)
10.0 AMPS / 120 VAC
5.0 AMPS / 240 VAC
1.6 AMPS / 380 VAC
DPT: 2.0 AMPS @ 120 VAC
MaxVac: 2 AMPS @ 120 VAC
Optional Spandrel Lighting:
15 AMPS @ 120VAC

continued on next page . . .

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 1-3
Introduction
Premier Specifications (continued)

Battery Backup (Premier B & C)


Programmable from 0 to 19 minutes in the event of power loss. Displays and
electronics continue to be available through Manager Mode for the life of the
battery. Low battery backup sensing. Separate battery backup for sales data
memory.

Standard Power Supply (Premier B & C)


Operating Temperature: -40 Degree C to +85 Degree C
Input Voltage: 120 VAC -10%, +10% (108 to 132 VAC) 50/60 HZ
220 VAC -10%, +10% (187 to 242 VAC) 50/60 HZ
Output Current: 2A Maximum
Output Noise: 5% pk to pk @ 2A +25 Degree C

Wide Range Power Supply (Premier B & C)


Operating Temperature: -40 Degree C to +85 Degree C
Input Voltage: 110 VAC -25%, +20% (82.5 to 132 VAC) 50/60 HZ
220 VAC -25%, +20% (165 to 264 VAC) 50/60 HZ
Output Current: 2A Maximum
Output Noise: 5% pk to pk @ 2A +25 Degree C

Displays (Premier B & C)


Fluorescent backlit LCD Displays
• Money Display: 1" high, 6 digits
• Volume Display: 1" high, 6 digits, gallons or liters
• Price Per Unit of Volume (PPUV) Display: .5" high, 4 digits
• DPT Display: .38" high, 4 line x 20 character
• INSIGHT DPT Display: 320 x 240 pixels graphic resolution
9 lines x 20 characters in text mode
• INSIGHT Debit Display: 4 lines x 20 characters

Pulsers (Premier B & C)


Dual phase pulsers with connect/disconnect sensing.
Pulses Per Gallon / Liter:
Premier B: 1000 pulses per gallon / 250 pulses per liter
Premier C: 400 pulses per gallon / 100 pulses per liter

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-4 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Introduction
Premier Specifications (continued)

Flow Control Valves (Premier B & C)


Non-blend dispensers: Dual flow, solenoid-operated diaphragm valves.
Blending dispensers: Software-controlled Proportional Blend Valves.
In Premier B, the valves and coils are located in the hydraulics enclosure.
In Premier C, the panel-mount valves are located in the hydraulics
enclosure and the coils are located in the electronics enclosure.

Meter (Premier B & C)


Three-piston, positive displacement meter can be calibrated in
increments as small as 1/5 cubic inch in five gallons.

Mechanical Totalizers (Premier B & C)


9999999.99 gallon or liter, non-resettable meter driven mechanical
totalizers.

Performance Requirements (Premier B & C)


Minimum Delivery Rate: 10 GPM @ 26 PSI inlet pressure.
Meter Accuracy: + .25% to 15 GPM

Fuel Limitations (Premier B & C)


Maximum Ethanol Content: 15%
Maximum Methanol Content: 15%

Filters (Premier B & C)


RC Models
Standard: One 7 micron or water alert 10 micron spin-on filter per product.
Options:
Diesel One strainer screen (40x40 mesh rating) per product.
Non-Diesel One strainer screen (90x100 mesh rating) per product.
Suction Models
Standard:
Diesel One strainer screen (40x40 mesh rating) per product.
Non-Diesel One strainer screen (90x110 mesh rating) per product.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 1-5
Introduction
Premier B & C Dispenser Features

Two Types of Dispenser Operation:


• Stand-alone Operation – All the activities to allow the
dispensing of fuel are performed by the dispenser alone. The
dispenser operates without a hose controller.
• Console Operation – Dispenser operations are controlled by
a console, hose controller, or site controller. All fuel sale
activities are monitored and controlled by a console or
controller.

Two Modes:
• Operating Mode – (also called Run Mode) This is the
standard running mode of the dispenser that allows the
customer to complete a fuel sale transaction.
• Programming Mode – (also called Manager Mode) This
mode allows the programmer to initialize and set software
selectable choices for dispenser operation.

Dispenser Payment Terminal (DPT) Option: Depending upon the DPT


options available on your dispenser, the customer can use a Credit Card,
Debit Card, Fleet Card, or Cash to pay for their fuel. Most DPTs include a
receipt printer.

Non-Blend Dispensers:
• A one or two-sided dispenser with up to four pure products
and four hoses per side.
• A one or two-sided dispenser with up to three pure products
and one hose per side.
• Operates via console control or in stand alone mode.
• Using a Model 67 series dispenser interface box, the
Premier C can operate with:
- Dispenser control consoles
- Dedicated Hose Controller (DHC)
- A third party site controller that supports the Premier
communication protocol.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-6 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Introduction
Premier B & C Dispenser Features (continued)

Blend Dispensers:
• Electronic Blend (EB) — A one or two-sided dispenser
with two straight grade products and one blended product
with one or three hoses per side. The blend ratio is
programmed in the manager modes.

• Variable Blend (B3, B4, B5) — A one or two-sided


dispenser with blended products dispensed from one hose
per side. The blend ratios for each product are programmed
in the manager modes.

• Transverse — A dispenser with products arranged in a


transverse (reverse) order from side A to side B. Transverse
refers to the position of the non-blended product (usually
Diesel).

Hose Controllers
Utilizing a Model 67 series dispenser interface box, the Premier can operate
with:
• Dispenser control consoles
• Dedicated Hose Controller (DHC)
• A third party site controller that supports the Premier
communication protocol.

Intercom/Speaker: Refer to the manual that came with your intercom


system.

Limitations: Only one hose per dispenser side can be active at a time.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 1-7
1-8
Tokheim Corporation

Introduction
PREMIER B (H and I) MODEL DISPENSERS
TOKHEIM MODEL NUMBER NOTATION
Dispenser Configuration Dispenser Features Dispenser Options

C C C C C CC F F F F F F O O O O O O O O O O O O O
H = High Hose
I = International Customer Specific Feature
F2 = Pump Stop
3 = 30 inch F3 = LIFT LEVER TO START
4 = 45 inch F4 = PPU Display, positions 2, 3 & 4

Dispenser Payment Terminal


(shown on next page)
1 = 1 side
2 = 2 sides Card Reader
(Must be selected in conjunction with a T-series DPT
Total Number of Hoses option on the next page)
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 R6 = 2 track, Magnetic Stripe Upper Left

B = Premier B Series Dispenser Graphic Printer


(Must be selected in conjunction with a G-series
R = Remote (submerged pump) INSIGHT™ DPT option on the next page)
R1PBA =Remote, 1 product, w/262A base adapter H1 = Printer with Keypad & Debit
R2PBA =Remote, 2 product w/262A base adapter H2 = Printer with Keypad, without Debit
RB3 = Remote, 3 blended prod/single hose outlet H3 = Printer without Keypad & Debit
RB3FD =Remote w/3 blend prods., plus one future diesel prod.
RB3TR =Remote w/3 blend prods., transverse Preset Pricing
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999

RB4TR= Remote w/4 blend prods., transverse P1 = Preset


RB4 = Remote, 4 blended prod/single hose outlet
RB5 = Remote, 5 blended prod/single hose outlet Cash/Credit Pricing
REB = Remote, 1 blended product, multiple hose outlets K1 = Dual Pricing
REBTR= Remote, 1 blend prod, multi-hose outlets, transverse
RTR = Remote, transverse Cash Acceptor
S = Suction (Must be selected in conjunction with a T-series DPT
S4x4 = Suction Motorcycle option on the next page)
SB3 = Suction w/ three blend prod/single hose outlet C2 = With lockable cassette
SB3+1= Suction B3 plus one Vapor Recovery
SB5 = Suction w/ five blend prod/single hose outlet V = Vapor Recovery
SDD = Suction Double Display IV = Ready for future Vapor Recovery Upgrade
SEB = Suction w/ one blend prod/multiple hose outlets PM = Partial Vapor (MaxVac/Interim)
SHS = Suction High Speed MV = MaxVac Vapor Recovery
Z = Glider Kit No Designation = Non Vapor
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

PREMIER B (H and I) MODEL DISPENSERS


TOKHEIM MODEL NUMBER NOTATION

Dispenser Configuration Dispenser Features Dispenser Options


C C C C C CC F F F F F F O O O O O O O O O O O O O

Dispenser Payment Terminal


(Includes Printer)
T2 = Card Reader ONLY
T3 = Cash Acceptor & Card Reader
T4 = DEBIT Card Reader ONLY (TDS Plus)
T5 = Cash Acceptor & DEBIT Card Reader (TDS Plus)
T7 = Card Reader ONLY (Gasboy)
T8 = Cash Acceptor & Card Reader (Gasboy)
T9 = Card Reader ONLY (Hebrew display)
T10 = Debit Card Reader (TDS)

INSIGHT™ Dispenser Payment Terminal


G1 = Non-DPT without Keypad
G2 = Non-DPT with Keypad
G3 = Card Reader Only - Upper Right
G4 = Card Reader Only - Upper Left
G5 = Card Reader - Upper Right, Cash Acceptor,
Locking Cassette
Tokheim Corporation

G6 = Card Reader - Upper Left, Cash Acceptor,


Locking Cassette
G7 = Card Reader - Upper Right, Cash Acceptor,
Non-Locking Cassette

Introduction
G8 = Card Reader - Upper Left, Cash Acceptor,
Non-Locking Cassette
1-9
1-10
Tokheim Corporation

Introduction
PREMIER B (H and I) MODEL DISPENSERS
TOKHEIM MODEL NUMBER NOTATION
Dispenser Options Battery
15A = Lead Acid
O O O O O O O O O O O O O 15B = Nicad
Door, Upper
1A = Painted Post Cover
1B = Stainless Steel 14A = Painted (In/Out)
14B = Stainless (In/Out)
Door, Lower 14C = Painted Black
2A = Painted 14D = Painted (In), Stainless (Out)
2B = Stainless Steel 14E = Stainless (In), Painted (Out)

Filters Motor
3J = Spin-On 11A = 120VAC, 1 phase.
3K = Strainer Screen 11B = 240VAC, 1 Phase
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

11C = 240VAC, 3 Phase


11D = 380VAC, 3 Phase
Product Identification Panels
4A = Single Piece Insert Speaker
4B = Multi-Piece Insert 10A = Without Speaker
10B = With Speaker
Raceway Width
Dispenser Software Operating Voltage
5A = 17"
6A = Universal domestic - JN 9A = 120V, 60Hz
5B = 24"
6B = Thailand - LG 9B = 240V, 50 Hz
5C = 24", Bottom Access
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999

6C = International - L 9C = 240V, 60 Hz
5D = 20", Bottom Access
6D = International - MK 01
6E = U.S.A. - MK 02 Measurement
6F = Brazil - MK 03 8A = Gallon
6G = Thailand - MK 04 8B = Liter
6H = Kuwait - MK 05 8C = Imperial Gallon
—— NOTICE —— 6I = Philippines - MK 06 8D = Gallon (60# Bypass)
The U.L. Listing for the dispenser 6J = Israel - MK 07 8E = Liter (60# Bypass)
6K = Korea - MK 08 8F = Imperial Gal. (60# Bypass)
does not cover all options. Only the
6L = Turkey - MK 09
dispensers (which carry the U.L. 6M = Malaysia - MK 10 Valance Panels
Listing mark) are covered by 6N = Pakistan - MK 11 7A = 24", Painted
Underwriters Laboratories. 6O = Singapore - MK 12 7B = 24", Stainless
6P = Hong Kong - MK 13 7C = 24", Painted w/Insert
6Q = Domestic (no icons) - JN 7D = 24", Stainless w/Insert
6R = Domestic, transverse - PZ 7E = Without Valance
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

PREMIER C MODEL DISPENSERS


TOKHEIM MODEL NUMBER NOTATION
Dispenser Configuration Dispenser Features Dispenser Options (shown on Page 1-6)

X X X X C XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
H = High Hose
Customer Specific Feature
F2 = Pump Stop
3 = 30 inch F3 = LIFT LEVER TO START
4 = 45 inch F4 = PPU Display, positions 2, 3 & 4

Dispenser Payment Terminal


1 = 1 side (shown on next page)
2 = 2 sides Card Reader
(Must be selected in conjunction with a
Total Number of Hoses T-series DPT option on the next page)
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 R7 = 2 track, Magnetic Stripe Dual Head

C = Premier C Series Dispenser Graphic Printer


(Must be selected in conjunction with a G-series
INSIGHT™ DPT option on the next page)
R = Remote H1 = Printer with Keypad & Debit
REB = Remote, 1 blended product, multiple hose outlets H2 = Printer with Keypad, without Debit
REBTR = Remote, 1 blended product, transverse H3 = Printer without Keypad & Debit
RB3 = Remote, 3 blendeded products, single hose outlet
RB3TR = Remote, 3 blended products, transverse right Preset Pricing
RB3TL = Remote, 3 blended products, transverse left P1 = Preset
RB4 = Remote, 4 blended products, single hose outlet
RB4TR = Remote, 4 blended products, transverse right Cash/Credit Pricing
RB4TL = Remote, 4 blended products, transverse left K1 = Dual Pricing
RB5 = Remote, 5 blended products, single hose outlet K2 = Single Pricing
RTR = Remote, transverse
S = Suction Cash Acceptor
Vapor Recovery
Tokheim Corporation

SB3 = Suction w/ three blend prod/single hose outlet (Must be selected in conjunction with
SB3+1 = Suction B3 plus one IV = Ready for future Vapor Recovery Upgrade a T-series DPT option on the next page)
SB5 = Suction w/ five blend prod/single hose outlet V = Vapor Recovery C2 = With lockable cassette
SEB = Suction w/ one blend prod/multiple hose outlets PM = Partial Vapor (MaxVac w/One Product IV)

Introduction
Z = Glider MV = MaxVac Vapor Recovery
No Designation = Non Vapor
1-11
1-12
Tokheim Corporation

Introduction
PREMIER C MODEL DISPENSERS
TOKHEIM MODEL NUMBER NOTATION
Dispenser Configuration Dispenser Features Dispenser Options (shown on Page 1-6)

X X X X C XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Dispenser Payment Terminal


(Includes Printer)
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

T2 = Card Reader ONLY


T3 = Cash Acceptor & Card Reader
T4 = DEBIT Card Reader ONLY (TDS Plus)
T5 = Cash Acceptor & DEBIT Card Reader (TDS Plus)
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00

T7 = Card Reader ONLY (Gasboy)


T8 = Cash Acceptor & Card Reader (Gasboy)
T9 = Card Reader ONLY (Hebrew display)
T10 = Debit Card Reader (TDS)

INSIGHT™ Dispenser Payment Terminal

G9 = Card Reader Only - Dual Head


G10 = Card Reader - Dual Head, Cash Acceptor, Locking
Cassette
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

PREMIER C MODEL DISPENSERS


TOKHEIM MODEL NUMBER NOTATION
Dispenser Options
Battery
X X X X X X X X X X X X X 15A = Lead Acid
Door, Upper
1A = Painted Post Cover
1B = Stainless Steel 14A = Painted (In/Out)
14B = Stainless (In/Out)
Door, Lower 14C = Painted Black
2A = Painted 14D = Painted (In), Stainless (Out)
2B = Stainless Steel 14E = Stainless (In), Painted (Out)

Filters Motor
3J = Spin-On 11A = 120VAC, 1 phase.
3K = Strainer Screen 11B = 240VAC, 1 Phase
11C = 240VAC, 3 Phase
11D = 380VAC, 3 Phase
Product Identification Panels
4A = Single Piece Insert Speaker
4B = Multi-Piece Insert 10A = Without Speaker
10B = With Speaker

Raceway Width Operating Voltage


5A = 17", Bottom Access 9A = 120V, 60Hz
Dispenser Software 9B = 240V, 50 Hz
6S = Universal domestic - QQ 9C = 240V, 60 Hz
6T = International - QR 01
6U = U.S.A. - QR 02
6V = Brazil - QR 03 Measurement
6W = Thailand - QR 04 8A = Gallon
—— NOTICE —— 6X = Kuwait - QR 05
Tokheim Corporation

8B = Liter
The U.L. Listing for the dispenser 6Y = Philippines - QR 06
does not cover all options. Only the 6Z = Israel - QR 07
dispensers (which carry the U.L. 6AA = Korea - QR 08 Valance Panels

Introduction
Listing mark) are covered by 6AB = Turkey - QR 09 7A = Painted
Underwriters Laboratories. 6AC = Malaysia - QR 10 7B = Stainless
6AD = Pakistan - QR 11 7E = Without Valance
1-13

6AE = Singapore - QR 12
6AF = Hong Kong - QR 13
Introduction
Premier B Dispenser Identification
Model H426B =
Premier B Dispenser
Model number notation information is 6 hoses (3 on each side)
located on pages 1-8 through 1-10.
Operational Diagrams are 2 Sides used
located on pages 1-19 through 1-25. 45" Cabinet
Model Type

H413B, H426B H414B, H428B,


H411B, H422B , H711B, H414B-EB, H428B-EB,
H422B-B3 & B5 H413B-EB, H426B-EB
H426B-RTR, H426B-REBTR H428B-RTR, H428B-REBTR

45" Cabinet 45" Cabinet 45" Cabinet


H411B = 1 side, 1 hose, 3 products H413B = 1 side, 3 hoses, 3 products H414B= 1 side, 4 hoses, 4 products
H422B = 2 sides, 2 hoses, 3 products H426B = 2 sides, 6 hoses, 3 products H428B = 2 sides, 8 hoses, 4 products
H422B-B3 & B5 = 2 sides, 2 hoses, H413B-EB = 1 side, 3 hoses, 3 products H414B-EB = 1 side, 4 hoses, 4 products
3 & 5 products H426B-EB = 2 sides, 6 hoses, 3 products H428B-EB = 2 sides, 8 hoses, 4 products
H711B = 1 side, 1 hose, 1 product H426B-RTR= 2 sides, 6 hoses, 3 products H428B-RTR = 2 sides, 8 hoses,
H426B-REBTR=2 sides, 6 hoses, 3 4 products
products (1 blended) H428B-REBTR = 2 sides, 8 hoses, 4
products (1 blended)
H422B-B3/B5, SIDE “B”
H422B
SIDE “B”

SIDE “B”

SIDE “A”

H411B,
SIDE “B”
H711B
SIDE “A”

SIDE “A”

BLENDED HOSE
FOR “-EB”
BLENDED HOSE
SIDE “A” FOR “-EB”

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-14 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Introduction
Premier B Dispenser Identification (continued)
Model H324B =
Premier B Dispenser
Model number notation information is 4 hoses (2 on each side)
located on pages 1-8 through 1-10.
Operational Diagrams are 2 Sides used
located on pages 1-19 through 1-25. 30" Cabinet
Model Type

H412B, H424B, H412B-B3(3+1),


H412B- B3(3+1), H424B-B3, H412B-B4(4+1), H311B, H322B, H322B-B3 & B5,
H424B-B4 H322B-R1PBA, & H322B-R2PBA H324B

45" Cabinet 30" Cabinet 30" Cabinet


H412B = 1 side, 2 hoses, 4 prod(3+1 non-blend) H322B-B3/B5 = 2 sides, 2 hoses (1 each H324B = 2 sides, 4 hoses
H412B-B3(3+1)= 1 side, 2 hoses, 4 products side) & 3/5 products respectively (2 each side),
H412B-B4(4+1)= 1 side, 2 hoses, 5 products H322B-R1PBA= 2 sides, 2 hoses, 1 prod. 2 products
H424B = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 4 prod (3+1 non-blend) H322B-R2PBA= 2 sides, 2 hoses, 2 prod.
H424B-B4(4+1)= 2 sides, 4 hoses, 5 products H311B = 1 side, 1 hose, 1 product
H424B-B3(3+1) = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 4 products H322B = 2 sides, 2 hoses, 1 product
H424B-B4(4+1) = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 5 products

H311B or H322B or
H311B-B3/B5 H322B-R1PBA
SIDE “B” SIDE “B” SIDE “B”

SIDE “B”

SIDE “A” SIDE “A” SIDE “A”

H322B-B3/5 or H322B-R2PBA
SIDE “B”

SIDE “A”

SIDE “A”
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 1-15
Introduction
Premier C Dispenser Identification
Model H426C =
Premier C Dispenser
Model number notation information is 6 hoses (3 on each side)
located on pages 1-11 through 1-13.
2 sides used
Operational Diagrams are
located on pages 1-19 through 1-25. 45" cabinet
Model Type

H422C-R, H413C-R, H426C-R (-S), H428C-R


H422C-RB3/RB5 H426C-REB, H428C-REB, H428C-SEB
H426C-RTR, H426C-REBTR

45" Cabinet 45" Cabinet 45" Cabinet


H422C-R =2 sides, 2 hoses, 3 products H413C-R = 1 side, 3 hoses, 3 products H428C-R = 2 sides, 8 hoses,
H422C-RB3/RB5 = 2 sides, 2 hoses, H426C-R (-S) = 2 sides, 6 hoses, 3 products 4 products
3 or 5 blended products H426C-REB = 2 sides, 6 hoses, H428C-REB = 2 sides, 8 hoses,
3 products (1 blended) 4 products (1 blended)
H426C-RTR = 2 sides, 6 hoses, 3 products, H428C-SEB = 2 sides, 8 hoses,
transverse 4 products (1 blended)
H426C-REBTR = 2 sides, 6 hoses,
3 products (1 blended), transverse
SIDE “B” SIDE “B”

SIDE “B”

SIDE “A”
SIDE “A” SIDE “A”
“-REB”
BLENDED
HOSE FOR

HOSE FOR
BLENDED

“-REB” or
“-SEB”

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-16 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Introduction
Premier C Dispenser Identification (continued)
Model H424C =
Premier C Dispenser
Model number notation information is 4 hoses (2 on each side)
located on pages 1-11 through 1-13.
Operational Diagrams are 2 sides used
located on pages 1-19 through 1-25. 45" cabinet
Model Type

H424C-RTL, H424C-RB3/4TL H424C-RTR, H424C-RB3/4TR

45" Cabinet 45" Cabinet


H424C-RTL = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 4 products, H424C-RTR = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 4 products,
(3 manifolded products, +1 non-manifolded product) (3 manifolded products, +1 non-manifolded product)

H424C-RB3/4TL = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 4 or 5 products H424C-RB3/4TR = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 4 or 5 products


(3 or 4 blended products, +1 non-blended product) (3 or 4 blended products, +1 non-blended product)

TL = Non-manifolded or Non-blended product/hose TR = Non-manifolded orNon-blended product/hose


located on left. located on right.
HOSE FOR
HOSE FOR

“RB3/4TR”
BLENDED
BLENDED

“RB3/4TL”

SIDE “B” SIDE “B”

SIDE “A” SIDE “A”


NON-MANIFOLED

NON-MANIFOLED

“H424C-RTR”
“H424C-RTL”

NON-BLEND

NON BLEND
HOSE FOR

HOSE FOR

HOSE FOR

HOSE FOR
HOSE FOR

HOSE FOR
“RB3/4TR”

“RB3/4TR”
BLENDED

BLENDED
“RB3/4TL”

“RB3/4TL”

OR
OR

OR

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 1-17
Introduction
Premier C Dispenser Identification (continued)
Model H324C =
Premier C Dispenser
Model number notation information is 4 hoses (2 on each side)
located on pages 1-11 through 1-13.
Operational Diagrams are 2 sides used
located on pages 1-19 through 1-25. 30" cabinet
Model Type
H424C-R, H424C-RB3+1, H322C-R, H322C-S, H324C-R, H324C-S
H424C-SB3+1 H322C-RB3/RB5, H322C-SB3/SB5

45" Cabinet 30" Cabinet 30" Cabinet


H424C-R = 2 sides, 4 hoses, 4 products, H322C-R = 2 sides, 2 hoses, 1 product H324C-R = 2 sides, 4 hoses,
(3 gas, 1 diesel) H322C-S = 2 sides, 2 hoses, 1 product 2 products
H424C-RB3+1 = 2 sides, 4 hoses, H322C-RB3/RB5 = 2 sides, 2 hoses, & H324C-S = 2 sides, 4 hoses,
4 products 3/5 products respectively 2 products
H424C-SB3+1 = 2 sides, 4 hoses, H322C-SB3/SB5 = 2 sides, 2 hoses, &
4 products 3/5 products respectively

SIDE “B” H322C-R H322C-RB3/RB5

SIDE “B” SIDE “B” SIDE “B”

SIDE “A” SIDE “A” SIDE “A”


SIDE “A”
NON BLEND

“RB3(3+1)”
“RB3(3+1)”

HOSE FOR
HOSE FOR
BLENDED

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-18 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Introduction
Operational Diagrams (Premier B & C)
Premier C Multi-hose (per side) Dispenser (H428C-R)

PRODUCT # -------------------- 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3 ------------------------ 4


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3) (HOSE 4)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3 HANDLE 4

HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

DISPENSER SIDE B METER METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2 PRODUCT #3 PRODUCT #4

METER METER METER METER


DISPENSER SIDE A POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3 HANDLE 4


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3) (HOSE 4)

PRODUCT # (F28) ------------ 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3 ------------------------ 4

Premier C 1 or 2 Hose Manifolded Dispenser (H424C-R)

PRODUCT # ---------------------------------------------- 1,2,3 ------------------------------------------------ 4


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4

MANIFOLD

HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

DISPENSER SIDE B METER METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2 PRODUCT #3 PRODUCT #4

METER METER METER METER


DISPENSER SIDE A POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

MANIFOLD

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
PRODUCT # (F28) -------------------------------------- 1,2,3 ------------------------------------------------ 4

= Optional

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 1-19
Introduction
Operational Diagrams (Premier B & C)
Premier C Electronic Blend Dispenser (H426C-REB)
PRODUCT # -------------------- 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3 ------------------------ 4
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3) (HOSE 4)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3 HANDLE 4

HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

METER METER METER


DISPENSER SIDE B POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2 +1 PRODUCT

METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4
DISPENSER SIDE A
BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3 HANDLE 4


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3) (HOSE 4)
PRODUCT # (F28) ------------ 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3 ------------------------ 4
= Optional

Premier Electronic Variable Blend Dispenser


(H424C-RB3, B4, or B5)
PRODUCT # ------------------------------------------- 1,2,3,4 ------------------------------------------------ 5
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4

HOSE
VALVE 4

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4
DISPENSER SIDE B
PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT # 2 +1 PRODUCT

DISPENSER SIDE A METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

HOSE
VALVE 4

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)

PRODUCT # (F28) ----------------------------------- 1,2,3,4 ------------------------------------------------ 5

= Optional

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-20 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Introduction
Transverse Dispenser Configurations (Premier C)
Product Locations
Transverse dispenser models have their products arranged in a transverse
(reverse) order from side A to side B. The last two letters of the model
number identifies a transverse left (TL) or a transverse right (TR) dispenser.
Refer to the operational diagrams on the following pages for product
locations on Tokheim transverse dispenser models.

Totalizer Locations
The totalizer locations on transverse dispenser models H424C-RB3TL(TR)
or H424C-RB4TL(TR) do not correspond with the locations of the products
on the dials and panels of the dispenser. See the illustration below to match
the totalizers with the products they are metering.

PRODUCTS #1-3 (RB3TL) NON-BLEND PRODUCT


PRODUCTS #1-4 (RB4TL) (DIESEL)

T1 T2 T4

TOP
VIEW Totalizers
TL = Transverse Left
TR = Transverse Right
T1 T2 T4

SIDE A

NON-BLEND PRODUCT PRODUCTS #1-3 (RB3TL)


(DIESEL) PRODUCTS #1-4 (RB4TL)

T1 = Meter Product #1 Totalizer


T2 = Meter Product #2 Totalizer
T4 = Meter Product #4 Totalizer
(non-blend product, usually Diesel)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 1-21
Introduction
Operational Diagrams (Premier C Transverse)
Premier C Manifolded, Transverse Dispenser (H424C-RTR)
PRODUCT # ----------------------------------------------- 4 ---------------------------------------------- 1,2,3
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
HANDLE 4 HANDLE 1

TL = Transverse Left
TR = Transverse Right
Refers to the position
of the non-manifolded MANIFOLD
product on these
models. HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE
VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

DISPENSER SIDE B METER METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2 PRODUCT #3 PRODUCT #4

METER METER METER METER


DISPENSER SIDE A POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

MANIFOLD

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
PRODUCT # (F28) ---------------------------------- 1,2,3 --------------------------------------------------- 4

Premier C Manifolded, Transverse Dispenser (H424C-RTL)

PRODUCT # ------------------------------------------ 1,2,3 --------------------------------------------------- 4


(HOSE 2) (HOSE 1)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4

MANIFOLD

HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

DISPENSER SIDE B METER METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2 PRODUCT #3 PRODUCT #4

METER METER METER METER


DISPENSER SIDE A POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

HOSE HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3 VALVE 4

MANIFOLD

HANDLE 4 HANDLE 1
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
PRODUCT # (F28) --------------------------------------- 4 ---------------------------------------------- 1,2,3

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-22 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Introduction
Operational Diagrams (Premier C Transverse)
Premier Electronic Variable Blend, Transverse Dispenser “4+1”
(H424C-RB4TR)
PRODUCT # ----------------------------------------------- 5 ----------------------------------------------- 1,2,3,4
(HOSE 2) (HOSE 1)
HANDLE 4 HANDLE 1

TL = Transverse Left
TR = Transverse Right
HOSE
Refers to the position VALVE 4
of the non-blended
BLENDING
product on these BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2
models.
METER METER METER
POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4
DISPENSER SIDE B
PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT # 2 +1 PRODUCT

DISPENSER SIDE A METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

HOSE
VALVE 4

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
PRODUCT # (F28) ------------------------------------- 1,2,3,4 ----------------------------------------------- 5
BLEND RATIO (F26) ------------------------------------- % ------------------------------------------------ NON

Premier Electronic Variable Blend, Transverse Dispenser “4+1”


(H424C-RB4TL)
PRODUCT # -------------------------------------------- 1,2,3,4 ------------------------------------------------ 5
(HOSE 2) (HOSE 1)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 4

HOSE
VALVE 4

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4
DISPENSER SIDE B
PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT # 2 +1 PRODUCT

DISPENSER SIDE A METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 3 POSITION 4

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

HOSE
VALVE 4

HANDLE 4 HANDLE 1
(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2)
PRODUCT # (F28) ---------------------------------------- 5 ----------------------------------------------- 1,2,3,4
BLEND RATIO (F26) ----------------------------------- NON ------------------------------------------------ %
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 1-23
Introduction
Operational Diagrams (Premier C Transverse)
Premier C Multi-hose, Transverse Dispenser (H426C-RTR)

PRODUCT ---------------------- 3 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 1


(HOSE 3) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 1)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3
TL = Transverse Left
TR = Transverse Right

HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3

DISPENSER SIDE B METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2 PRODUCT #3

METER METER METER


DISPENSER SIDE A POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3

HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3)
PRODUCT # (F28) ------------ 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3

Premier C Multi-hose, Transverse Dispenser (H426C-RTL)

PRODUCT ---------------------- 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3


(HOSE 3) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 1)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3

HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3

DISPENSER SIDE B METER METER METER


POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2 PRODUCT #3

METER METER METER


DISPENSER SIDE A POSITION 1 POSITION 2 POSITION 3

HOSE HOSE HOSE


VALVE 1 VALVE 2 VALVE 3

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3)
PRODUCT # (F28) ------------ 3 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 1

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-24 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Introduction
Operational Diagrams (Premier C Transverse)
Premier C Electronic Blend, Transverse Dispenser
(H426C-REBTR)
PRODUCT ---------------------- 3 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 1
(HOSE 3) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 1)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3

TL = Transverse Left
HOSE HOSE
TR = Transverse Right VALVE 1 VALVE 3

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

METER METER
DISPENSER SIDE B POSITION 1 POSITION 3

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2

METER METER
POSITION 1 POSITION 3
DISPENSER SIDE A
BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

HOSE HOSE
VALVE 1 VALVE 3

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3)
PRODUCT # (F28) ------------ 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3
BLEND RATIO (F26) ------ NON ---------------------- 50 ------------------- NON

Premier C Electronic Blend, Transverse Dispenser


(H426C-REBTL)
PRODUCT ---------------------- 1 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 3
(HOSE 3) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 1)
HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3

HOSE HOSE
VALVE 1 VALVE 3

BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

METER METER
DISPENSER SIDE B POSITION 1 POSITION 3

PRODUCT #1 PRODUCT #2

METER METER
POSITION 1 POSITION 3
DISPENSER SIDE A
BLENDING BLENDING
VALVE 1 VALVE 2

HOSE HOSE
VALVE 1 VALVE 3

HANDLE 1 HANDLE 2 HANDLE 3


(HOSE 1) (HOSE 2) (HOSE 3)
PRODUCT # (F28) ------------ 3 ----------------------- 2 ------------------------ 1
BLEND RATIO (F26) ------ NON ---------------------- 50 ------------------- NON

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 1-25
Introduction
Electronic Blend Valve Operation (Premier B & C)
Each blended product per dispenser side requires a Blend Controller Valve
assembly, which consists of four solenoids and two blend regulator valves.
The blended product is produced by cycling the four solenoids, which then
control the positions of the two diaphragm-operated blend regulator valves.

SOLENOIDS SOLENOIDS

BLEND BLEND
REGULATOR REGULATOR
VALVE VALVE

From each pure grade product per dispenser side, there are two solenoids and
one blend regulator valve.
The inlet solenoid is normally closed (N.C.).
The outlet solenoid is normally open (N.O.).
The position of the blend regulator valve is determined by the two solenoids
cycling to increase or decrease the amount of pressurized product acting
against the regulating valve's actuating diaphragm.

BLEND
REGULATOR
VALVE
INLET OUTLET
SOLENOID SOLENOID Varying product
pressure here. . .

. . .opens/closes
regulating valve here

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-26 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Introduction
Electronic Blend Valve Operational Sequence
1. When a blended product is selected and dispensing begins, the two inlet
(N.C.) solenoids are activated (opened). Slow flow begins at a rate of
one gallon per minute per solenoid (2 gallons per minute total). After
seven pulses are received, full flow begins and blend regulation begins.
2. The Blend Controller board monitors the two pure grade sets of pulses
received from the pulsers and communicates with the Expanded
Computer board. The Blend Controller board keeps a count of the pulses
from each product pulser in an accumulative pulse counter. The Blend
Controller board looks at the accumulative pulse counter every 40
milliseconds until 100 total pulses are received.
If 100 pulses are not received in a 40 millisecond time span, no ratio
calculation is performed, and the pulse counter is checked after the next
40 milliseconds.

3. The Blend Controller board tells the Expanded Computer board how
many pulses came from each pulser. Once 100 total pulses are received
and the blend ratio is not programmed for 100% of product 1 or product
2, the Blend Controller board checks to see:
• if in the 100 pulses, at least one pulse was received from
each of the 2 pulsers (this is referred to as 100 valid pulses),
then the blend ratio is checked and the counter is reset.
• if all 100 pulses were received from one pulser (this is
referred to as 100 invalid pulses), the sale is stopped and an
error is displayed.
If the blend ratio is programmed for 100% of either product, the Blend
Controller board checks to see:
• if 100 pulses were received from two pulsers (this is referred
to as 100 invalid pulses), the sale is stopped and an error is
displayed.

4. If the calculated blend ratio does not match the programmed blend ratio,
the Expanded Computer board determines a solenoid control adjustment
to maintain an accuracy of 1/2% of the programmed blend ratio:
• for the first 1/2 gallon of flow, the blend ratio checking is
performed, but no errors are displayed if they occur
• by the end of the first 1/2 gallon of flow, a 20% blend ratio
accuracy must be obtained or flow is stopped
• from 1/2 gallon to 2 gallons, the system's accuracy must
remain within 20% of its blend ratio or blend errors are
displayed and product flow is stopped
• after 2 gallons the blend ratio error checking requires 3% or
better blend accuracy or errors are displayed and product
flow is stopped

Electronic Blend Valve Operational Sequence continued on next page...

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 1-27
Introduction
Electronic Blend Valve Operational Sequence
(continued)
5. To keep the blend accuracy within the required tolerances, the solenoids
are cycled by varying the duration and frequency rate of the +24 VDC
solenoid control pulses. In a 60:40 blend, the 60% product is designated
The Blender Valve as the primary product (i.e. the larger of the two products).
Power Supply
Assembly 6. The inlet solenoid of the primary product stays open all the time while
provides +24 vdc
the secondary product valve's solenoid provides the mixing.
to the Blend Valve
Interface Board to
If line pressure differentials occur, such as submerged pump pressure
operate the blend variations or restricted filters, and the system is unable to bring the
control solenoids. blend ratio to within the required tolerances by varying the duration and
frequency of the solenoids, the blending process is reversed. The inlet
solenoid of the secondary product stays open all the time and the
primary product valve's solenoid provides the mixing.

7. If 3% blend accuracy is not achieved after 2 gallons, or the blend ratio


exceeds the 3% accuracy tolerance anytime during the sale, the system
allows an additional .50 gallons (500 pulses) to be dispensed to bring the
accuracy to within 3%. During this time the solenoid positions are varied
to bring the blend ratio back into the 3% acceptable tolerance.

8. If the calculation determines that the ratio has been brought back into
tolerance:
• the error counter is reset
• the corrected solenoid valve(s) positions are maintained
• the pulse counter is reset and another 40 millisecond count
sequence begins

9. If the blend ratio is not brought back within tolerance, a blend error is
displayed and product flow stops.

Although the system does not display an error unless the blend ratio goes
outside of the 3% range, the system works to maintain accuracy of 1/2 %. If
the calculation determines that the blend ratio error is greater than 1/2 %, the
solenoid valve(s) are adjusted. The solenoid valves involved are determined
by the primary and secondary product ratio and the direction that the blend
ratio is out of tolerance. The amount of valve adjustment depends on how far
the blend ratio accuracy is out of tolerance.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-28 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Introduction
System Overview

PREMIER DISPENSER

DPT ELECTRONICS

MODEL 69 DPT MODEL 67


INTERFACE DISPENSER
BOX INTERFACE
BOX
The TED (Tokheim
Encryption Device) box is
only used when your
dispenser includes standard TEDBOX DHC
DPT with TDS controller (SEE NOTE) OR
VXDHC
boards. See Section 7 for
more information on the
TED box.

SITE CONTROLLER

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 1-29
Introduction

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


1-30 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Accessing Electrical Components

Section 2: Accessing Electrical Components


Scope
! WARNING
All installations must This section includes information for identifying side A, disconnecting
conform to NFPA power to the dispenser, and gaining access to electrical components.
(National Fire
Protection Agency)
30, 30A, 70 and
applicable National, Section 2 Contents
State, and Local code
requirements. Dispenser Orientation (Premier B & C) .......................................... 2-2
Otherwise, severe
injury or death could Premier B Components
result.
Electronics Enclosure Components ............................................... 2-4
Accessing the Card Cage .............................................................. 2-6
Accessing the Card Cage Circuit Boards ....................................... 2-8
Accessing the DPT Controller Boards ........................................... 2-9
Accessing MaxVac Vapor Recovery Components ....................... 2-10
Accessing the Connection Box ..................................................... 2-11

Premier C Components
Electronics Enclosure Components
Premier C with Standard DPT and Cash Acceptor Options ... 2-12
Premier C with INSIGHT DTP & TDS Options ...................... 2-14
Accessing Hardware on Premier C .............................................. 2-16
Accessing the Card Cage ............................................................ 2-17
Accessing the Card Cage Circuit Boards ..................................... 2-17
Accessing the DPT Controller Boards ......................................... 2-18
Accessing MaxVac Vapor Recovery Components ....................... 2-19
Accessing the Connection Box .................................................... 2-20

V
! DANGER
Gasoline and petroleum products
are flammable.
The hazard or unsafe practice may
result in death or severe injury to
persons or damage to equipment
or property.
Follow ALL safety precautions as
outlined in the Safety Information
section at the front of this manual.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-1
Accessing Electrical Components
Dispenser Orientation (Premier B & C)

Determining Side A on the Dispenser


1. Look at the base of the dispenser.
2. The side with the model/serial number plate is Side A of the
dispenser.

SIDE A
Never use the location
of a specific product
on the dispenser to
determine Side A. Use
the serial plate as the
reference.

Model/Serial
plate location

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-2 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Dispenser Orientation (continued)

Determining Product Number Assignments (Premier B & C)


Examples of product number orientation on selected models are shown
below. Side B product (assignment) numbers for a model H422 can be
programmed in ascending or descending order. The assigned numbers are
used by the console to identify the hose or product. For more information,
reference manager Mode F28 in section 4.

TYPICAL H413, H426 TYPICAL H411, H422

PRODUCT NUMBERS - SIDE B PRODUCT NUMBERS - SIDE B


P1 P2 P3 P3 P2 P1

P1 P2 P3 P1 P2 P3
PRODUCT NUMBERS - SIDE A PRODUCT NUMBERS - SIDE A

In this example, side B In this example, side B


product assignments are product assignments are
programmed to mirror programmed to match side
side A product assignments. A's product assignments
(transverse).

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-3
Accessing Electrical Components
Electronics Enclosure Components (Premier B)

Premier B with standard DPT and Cash Acceptor Options

P P
2 P
3
7 P
5
P
4

P
11

P
10

P
1
P
8 P
8 P
8

P
9 P
9 P
9

P
12 P
13 P
14

P
6

P
1 OPERATOR INTERFACE KEYPAD P8 CASH PRICE PER UNIT VOLUME DISPLAY
2 CUSTOMER PROMPTS DISPLAY AREA* P
P 9 CREDIT PRICE PER UNIT VOLUME DISPLAY**

P
3 MONEY DISPLAY P
10 ACCESS PANEL TO CASH ACCEPTOR CASSETTE

P VOLUME DISPLAY
4 P
11 DPT PRINTER PANEL

P
5 MAGNETIC KEYSWITCH AREA P
12 RECEIPT SLOT**

P
6 PRODUCT SELECTION KEYPAD AREA P
13 CASH ACCEPTOR**

P DPT DISPLAY **
7 P CARD READER**
14

*DISPLAYED ON NON-DPT ONLY **THESE ITEMS ARE OPTIONAL

Keypads
Operator Interface (optional on the 411/422)
• used for data entry, starting and stopping the dispenser, and
manager mode programming.
• will contain MOP (Method Of Payment) selection keys if
dual-MOPs are utilized.
• may contain keys to operate a DPT if one is installed.
• will require programming (via Mode 29) at initial power up
Product Selection (provided on single-hose Premier dispensers and
dispensers with Debit DPT, if applicable)
• this keypad is used for product selection, entering manager
mode if Debit DPT is present, and programmed as a Start
key if a Debit DPT is present.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-4 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Electronics Enclosure Components (Premier B)

Premier B with INSIGHT™ DPT & TDS Options

P
7 P
2 P
2

6 5 4 3 2
1
P
1
12 11 10 9 8

18 17 16 15 14
13
24 23 22 21 20

P P
5 P
4
6
P
3

P
1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY* P
5 PRINTER (STANDARD OR GRAPHIC*)

P
2 SOFTKEYS KEYPAD* P
6 REMOTE KEYPAD (TDS, TDS PLUS, AND FLEET ONLY)*

P
3 CARDREADER* P
7 DEBIT DISPLAY (TDS PLUS ONLY)*

P
4 CASH ACCEPTOR*

*THESE ITEMS ARE OPTIONAL

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 2-5
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the Card Cage on Premier B
(All models except H300B Series Dispensers)
! WARNING From side A: (Refer to illustration on next page)
Hazard of electrical 1. Unlock the access panel (rightmost panel) and remove it.
shock. Remove ALL 2. At the upper left corner of this opening, push the slide left to release the
electrical power to the Display Dialface (not shown), while pushing in on the Display Dialface.
dispenser, lights, 3. Pull and raise the Display Dialface. If a product selection keypad exists
electronics, and on the Display Dialface, hold onto the Dialface while disconnecting the
communications. More
harnesses from the display board at J3 & J7.
than one disconnect
switch may be required
4. Set the Display Dialface in a safe location.
to remove power. 5. On the display board assembly, rotate the top corner fasteners 1/4 turn
counter-clockwise and gently lower the display.

Accessing the Card Cage on Premier B


( H300B Series only)
From side A: (Refer to illustration on next page)
1. Unlock and remove the applicable dial on your dispenser. Follow the
instructions below.
Printer - Unlock Printer. Tilt top of Printer toward you and disconnect
printer harness. Lift Printer Assembly up and out. Place in a safe
location. Go to step 2.2.
Keypad Dial Assembly - Unlock Keypad Dial Assembly. Tilt toward
you and disconnect the keypad harness. Lift Dial up and out. Place in a
safe location. Go to step 2.3.
Blank Dial Assembly - Unlock Blank Dial Assembly. Remove and
discard blank dial. A new Keypad Dial Assembly will be installed in its
place in a later step. Go to step 2.3
2. At the upper right corner of the printer opening, pull the slide latch to the
left to release the DPT Dial Assembly (while pushing in on the top of the
dial assembly). Tilt the DPT Dial Assembly toward you and let it rest in
the forward hinged position.
3. At the upper right corner of this opening, pull the slide latch to the left to
release the Display Dialface (not shown), while pushing in on the
Display Dialface.
4. Lift the Display Dialface up and out. If a product selection keypad is
installed on the dispenser, hold the Display Dialface while disconnecting
the 2 harnesses from the display board at J3 & J7.
5. Carefully place the Display Dialface in a safe location.
6. On the display board assembly, rotate the top corner fasteners 1/4 turn
counter-clockwise and gently lower the display.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-6 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the Card Cage on Premier B (continued)

BLANK
DIAL DISPLAY BOARD
ASSEMBLY

Your dispenser may


have a Keypad Dial
Assembly or Blank Dial
Assembly instead of a KEYPAD J3 J7
DPT Dial and Printer. DIAL
ASSEMBLY

[Printer][ DPT Dial ][ Display Dialface ] [ Access Panel ]

CARD
CAGE

SERIAL PLATE LOCATION


(WHEN LOOKING AT SIDE A)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-7
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the Card Cage Circuit Boards (Premier B)
To gain access to the circuit boards, remove and save the two screws and
! WARNING! retainer bracket shown below. Carefully remove the circuit boards using the
Turn off the power nylon card ejectors on the front corners of each board.
switch and push the
Interface board Control
Button before removing
any boards!

Power Switch

Retainer Screws

Retainer Bracket

Control Button

Accessing Options CASH


CASH ACCEPTOR
ACCEPTOR CASSETTE

DPT
PRINTER

DPT CONTROLLER PREMIER B DISPENSER


BOARD ELECTRONICS ENCLOSURE

DPT PANEL

OR
NON-DPT PANEL (USED WHEN NO DPT IS PRESENT)

For access to the DPT Printer, Cash Acceptor and Cassette, see Section 7
For access to the INSIGHT™ DPT and Graphic Printer, see Section 8.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-8 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the DPT Controller Boards (Premier B )
Standard DPT and INSIGHT DPT Controller Boards
1. The card cage must be accessed first, refer to page 2-6 for instructions.
2. Look at the top and bottom of the left side of the card cage opening.
Locate the “slide” fasteners just like the one used to access the card cage
area. Note the following model differences:
• 30" Premier has only the top slide fastener
• 45" Premier has both top and bottom slide fasteners
3. Referring to the diagram below,
m Top slide fastener moves left to disengage “
n Bottom slide fastener moves right to disengage ˆ
Gently pull the DPT dial section out towards you until the DPT
controller board is accessible. BE CAREFUL! This assembly will fall
out if pulled too far! (10" maximum)
4. If side B access is desired, repeat all steps for side B.

Gently pull the DPT dial section out


towards you until the DPT board is
accessible — BE CAREFUL! — This
assembly will fall out if pulled too far!
(10" max.)

SERIAL PLATE LOCATION


(side A)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-9
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing MaxVac Vapor Recovery System
Components (Premier B)

Unlock and Remove the Access Panel on:


See section 9 • Side A to access the MaxVac Motor Control board
for detailed • Side B to access the MaxVac Power Supply board
information on
the MaxVac
Vapor Recovery
System.

ACCESS
PANEL

SIDE A MAXVAC MOTOR


CONTROL BOARD IS
MAXVAC POWER SUPPLY
ACCESSED FROM SIDE A
BOARD IS ACCESSED FROM
(MOUNTED TO A SUPPORT
SIDE B (MOUNTED TO A
BRACKET).
SUPPORT BRACKET)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-10 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the Connection Box (Premier B)
! WARNING The connection box is located behind the lower door on Side B of the
Hazard of electrical dispenser (for models 412, 414, 424 & 428, the connection box is on Side A).
shock. More than one Side B does NOT have the serial plate attached to it. Unlock the keylock at
disconnect switch each end of the lower door to gain access to the connection box.
may be required to
de-energize the device.
Open the circuit before
removing cover. Keep
cover secured when
power is applied.

KEYLOCKS

1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
9
1 +485 DPT A COMM 1 6
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
TERMINAL BLOCK 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
SIGNALS 2 +485 DPT B COMM 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
3 -485 DPT A COMM 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
4 -485 DPT B COMM 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
3 10
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
5 DCC DPT A COMM
6
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
6 DCC DPT B COMM 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
TTC 1 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
7 4
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
TTD 2 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
DCC 3 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
NO CONNECTION 4 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
5 8
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
See section 4 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
16
MOTOR CONTROL 2 6 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
for information 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
MOTOR CONTROL 3 7 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
on intercom 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
MOTOR CONTROL 4 8 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
2
speaker wiring. 1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
1234567890123456789012345678901212345
UDC ACH 9
CONNECTION BOX
UDC ACC 10
DISP LIGHTS ACH 11 ! WARNING
DISP LIGHTS ACC 12 When replacing the connection
VALANCE LIGHTS ACH 13 box cover, tighten the cover bolts
VALANCE LIGHTS ACC 14
using the tightening order shown.
An incorrect tightening order may
SPARE ACH 15
result in a flame path violation.
SPARE ACC 16

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 2-11
Accessing Electrical Components
Electronics Enclosure Components (Premier C)

Premier C with Standard DPT and Cash Acceptor Options

„ ‰
 …
ƒ † Š
‚ ‡
ˆ

m Primary Access Door


This door provides access to the dual-head cardreader, printer, cash acceptor
cassette and intrinsically safe barrier board. The lock requires a TPX-88 key.
Open this door first to gain access to the other door(s) on this side of the
electronics enclosure. A release latch for the next door is located on the right
side of the door opening.

‚ Receipt Slot for DPT Printer*

ƒ Dual Head Cardreader*

„ Money/Volume Display (two 6-digit displays)


• In operating mode, they display total sale currency and total
sale in gallons or liters, respectively.
• In manager mode, they display programming information.

* These components are optional.


Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
2-12 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Electronics Enclosure Components (Premier C)

… Price Per Unit Volume Displays (4-digit displays)


• One PPUV display per product and price. Each PPUV
display has an arrowhead that is turned on when that product
and price is selected.
• Dual-price dispensers have two PPUV displays per product.
• Single-price dispensers have one PPUV display per product
and is located in the top PPUV position. The bottom PPUV
is covered.

† Product Selection Keypad (1 x 5)


This keypad is provided on single-hose dispensers and dispensers with Debit
DPT. This keypad is used for:
• Product selection (no DPT or non-debit DPT installed)
• Manager mode programming if Debit DPT is installed
• Start key if Debit DPT is installed

‡ DPT Display* (Standard, 4-line x 20-character display)


Used with the standard DPT keypad to display customer instructions.

ˆ Operator Interface Keypad (4 x 6)*


• Used for manager mode programming and starting and
stopping the dispenser. Not used for manager mode
programming if Debit DPT components are installed.
• Provides preset input if presets are enabled.
• Includes MOP (Method Of Payment) selection buttons if
dual-MOPs are utilized.
• May include buttons to operate a DPT.

‰ Keyswitch Area
The location where the manager or arming key is placed to enter or exit
manager's mode and to arm or disarm a dispenser.

Š Cash Acceptor*

* These components are optional.


Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-13
Accessing Electrical Components
Electronics Enclosure Components (Premier C)

Premier C with INSIGHT™ DPT & TDS Options

†

‡
ƒ
… ˆ Š
‚
‰
„

 Primary Access Door


This door provides access to the dual-head cardreader, printer (standard or
graphic), cash acceptor cassette and intrinsically safe barrier board. The lock
requires a TPX-88 key. Open this door first to gain access to the other door(s)
on this side of the electronics enclosure. A release latch for the next door is
located on the right side of the door opening.

‚ Receipt Slot for DPT (standard or graphic) Printer *

ƒ INSIGHT Debit Display (4-lines x 20-characters)*


Used with the Debit DPT keypad. Displays customer instructions for debit
transactions.

„ Remote Keypad (TDS, TDS Plus, and Fleet only)*

… Dual Head Cardreader*

* These components are optional.


Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
2-14 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Electronics Enclosure Components (Premier C)

† Money/Volume Display (two 6-digit displays)


• In operating mode, they display total sale currency and total
sale in gallons or liters, respectively.
• In manager mode, they display programming information.
• The shaded rectangle (for illustration purposes only) to the
right of the money/volume display is the area where the
manager or arming key is placed to enter/exit manager's
mode or to arm or disarm a dispenser.

‡ Price Per Unit Volume Displays (4-digit displays)


• One PPUV display per product and price. Each PPUV
display has an arrowhead that is turned on when that product
and price is selected.
• Dual-price dispensers have two PPUV displays per product.
• Single-price dispensers have one PPUV display per product
and is located in the top PPUV position. The bottom PPUV
is covered.

ˆ Product Selection Keypad (1 x 5)


This keypad is provided on single-hose dispensers and dispensers with Debit
DPT. This keypad is used for:
• Product selection (no DPT or non-debit DPT installed)
• Manager mode programming if Debit DPT is installed
• Start key if Debit DPT is installed

‰ INSIGHT DPT Display & Operator Interface Keypad*


(Graphic or 9-lines x 20-characters in text mode)
Used with the standard INSIGHT DPT keypad. Displays customer
instructions for card or cash transactions.
• The softkeys located along the sides of the INSIGHT
graphic display serve as the operator interface keypad.
• Used for data entry, starting and stopping the dispenser, and
manager mode programming (not used for manager mode
programming if Debit DPT components installed).
• Provides preset input if presets are enabled.
• Includes MOP (Method Of Payment) selection keys if dual-
MOPs are utilized.

Š Cash Acceptor*

* These components are optional.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-15
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing Hardware on Premier C

Primary Access Door Lock: One lock per side of the dispenser head
provides access to opening the other door(s). Printers are easily accessed for
changing paper behind this primary access door.

Primary Access SIDE A


Door Lock

Lower
Door Locks

! CAUTION
The lower door locks
are a draw style lock
that pull the door in
when turned clockwise.
Hand-tighten only to
prevent key from
breaking off in lock.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-16 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the Card Cage on Premier C
! WARNING
Hazard of electrical 1. Identify side A of the dispenser. It is the side with the serial plate.
shock. More than one 2. Using a TPX88 key, unlock and open the left door of the electronics
disconnect switch enclosure.
may be required to 3. At the middle right edge of this door opening, release the latch that
remove power.
secures the middle door.
4. Open the middle door to expose the card cage. See the card cage
illustration below.

! WARNING! Accessing the Card Cage Circuit Boards


Turn off the power To gain access to the circuit boards, remove and save the two screws and
switch and push the
retainer bracket shown below. Carefully remove the circuit boards using the
Interface board Control
Button before removing
nylon card ejectors on the front corners of each board.
any boards!

CARD CAGE


‚
ƒ

… ‡
! CAUTION
Static electricity can
result in circuit board „
failure. Wear a
grounded static strap †
to protect the
components from
static discharge.
Connect the static
strap clip to any sheet
metal edge of the card  AC Power Switch
cage in the electronics ‚ Screws for Circuit Board Retainer Bracket
enclosure.
ƒ Circuit Board Retainer Bracket
„ CPU Board
… Control Button on Interface Board
† J20 Battery Connection
‡ Options Power Supply

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-17
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the DPT Controller Boards (Premier C )
Standard DPT and INSIGHT DPT Controller Boards

On Side A: Unlock and open the primary access door.

On Side B:
See sections 7 1. Unlock and open the primary access door of the electronics enclosure
and 8 for detailed using a TPX88 key.
information on the 2. At the middle right edge of this door opening, release the latch that
DPT Controller secures the middle door.
Boards.
3. Open the middle door and release the latch that secures the right access
door. This step is for H400C series dispensers only.

PRIMARY
ACCESS
DOOR

SIDE A
THE DPT CONTROLLER BOARDS
ARE ACCESSED FROM THE
PRIMARY ACCESS DOOR ON SIDE
A OR FROM THE RIGHT ACCESS
DOOR ON SIDE B

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-18 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing MaxVac Vapor Recovery System
Components (Premier C)

On Side A:
1. Unlock and open the primary access door of the electronics enclosure
using a TPX88 key.
See section 9 for
2. At the middle right edge of this door opening, release the latch that
detailed
information on the
secures the middle door.
MaxVac Vapor 3. Open the middle door and release the latch that secures the right access
Recovery System. door. This step is for H400C series dispensers only.

On Side B: Unlock and open the primary access door.

PRIMARY
ACCESS
DOOR

SIDE A THE MAXVAC MOTOR CONTROL


BOARD(S) AND POWER SUPPLY
ASSEMBLY ARE ACCESSED FROM
THE RIGHT ACCESS DOOR ON SIDE
A OR THE PRIMARY ACCESS DOOR
ON SIDE B

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 2-19
Accessing Electrical Components
Accessing the Connection Box (Premier C)
Locating the Connection Box
! WARNING
The connection box is located on Side B of the dispenser, behind the lower
Hazard of electrical
shock. More than one door. Side B is the side that does not have the serial plate attached to the base
disconnect switch of the dispenser. Unlock the lower door on side B of the dispenser to gain
may be required to access to the connection box. Be sure to follow the tightening order shown
de-energize the device. below when replacing the cover to the connection box.
Open the circuit before
removing cover. Keep
cover secured when Terminal Block Signals
power is applied.
You may or may not require connections to all of the signals, depending on
the type of dispenser and options installed.

TERMINAL BLOCK SIGNALS


1 TTC

2 TTD

3 CONSOLE DCC

4 + 485 DPT

5 - 485 DPT

There are no SIDE B 6 DCC DPT

connections to the 7 NO CONNECTION

terminal strip in the 8 NO CONNECTION


connection box for 9 ACH UDC
Intercom/Speaker 10 ACC UDC
wiring or Spandrel 11 ACH LIGHTS
wiring. Intercom/
12 ACC LIGHTS
speaker field wires
13 ACH SPARE
will be joined together
with the dispenser 14 ACC SPARE

intercom/speaker 15 ACH MOTOR CONTROL 1


wires in the dispenser 16 ACH MOTOR CONTROL 2
connection box. 17 ACH MOTOR CONTROL 3

18 ACH MOTOR CONTROL 4

! WARNING TIGHTENING ORDER FOR COVER BOLTS

When replacing the 2 13 4 6 8 10


connection box cover,
tighten the cover bolts
using the tightening 11 1 18
TERMINAL BLOCK
order shown. An 14
incorrect tightening
9
order may result in a
flame path violation. 7 5 3 1 12

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


2-20 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
System Circuit Boards
Section 3: System Circuit Boards

SCOPE
This section provides information for identifying the circuit boards used in
! CAUTION Premier B and C series dispensers. Each circuit board is described as to
Static electricity can features, functions, connectors, and test points as applicable.
result in circuit board
For MaxVac system circuits boards, see Section 9.
failure. Wear a
grounded static strap
For DPT circuit boards, see Sections 7 and 8.
to protect the
components from Section 3 Contents
static discharge.
Connect the static Common Circuit Boards for Premier B and C
strap clip to any sheet Circuit Board Orientation ............................................................... 3-2
metal edge of the card Mother Board ................................................................................ 3-3
cage in the electronics
enclosure. Interface Board .............................................................................. 3-6
Expanded Computer Board ........................................................... 3-8
Multiplex Board ............................................................................ 3-10
Relay Board .................................................................................. 3-11
AC Distribution Board .................................................................. 3-12
AC Distribution Wiring Schematic ................................................ 3-16
Blend Control Board .................................................................... 3-17
Valve Interface Board .................................................................. 3-18
Options Power Supply ................................................................. 3-19

Circuit Boards for Premier B Only


LED Board ................................................................................... 3-21
Display Board .............................................................................. 3-22

Circuit Boards for Premier C Only


Display Board .............................................................................. 3-25
Intrinsically Safe Barrier (ISB) Assembly ..................................... 3-27

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-1
System Circuit Boards
Circuit Board Orientation (Premier B & C)

Non-Blend
UDCB TRANSFORMER POWER
Dispensers EXPANDED COMPUTER BD.
SWITCH
HEATING ELEMENT
INTERFACE BD.
FAN ASSEMBLY

MOTHER BD.

RELAY BD. #2
Circuit board names
with dotted lines RELAY BD. #1
around them indicate
that different boards
are used for a blender
dispenser.
OPTIONS POWER
SUPPLY
(FOR BLENDERS AND
DPT)
BATTERY PACK
DPT TRANSFORMER

MULTIPLEX BD.

Blend
Dispensers EXPANDED COMPUTER BD.
POWER HEATING ELEMENT
SWITCH
UDCB TRANSFORMER FAN ASSEMBLY

INTERFACE BD.

MOTHER BD.

VALVE INTERFACE BD.

Circuit board names RELAY BD. #1


with dotted lines
around them indicate
that different boards OPTIONS POWER SUPPLY
are used for a non- (FOR BLENDERS AND DPT)
blend dispenser.
BATTERY PACK
DPT TRANSFORMER

BLEND CONTROL BD.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-2 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
System Circuit Boards
Mother Board - 420935 (Premier B & C)
• All connectors are locking type and are polarized
• Contains the circuit breaker for the battery
• Contains the circuitry for the intercom’s push-button, and for
DPT detection
CHASSIS GROUND PAD
(REV. 5 BOARDS ) CHASSIS GROUND PAD

REV. 4 OR
PRIOR BOARDS

PROD PROD
1 3 PROD 4

MULTIPLEX / BLEND CONTROL

RELAY #2 / VALVE INTERFACE


PROD 3
INTERFACE

PROD PROD

RELAY #1
REV. 5
2 4 CPU BOARDS J2

PROD 2

PROD 1

MOTOR CONTROL
DISPLAY A DISPLAY B

Connectors of the Mother Board


J1 - Transformer Input J16 - DPT 1 Communication
J2 - Valve AC Input J17 - DPT 2 Communication
J3 - Product 1 (Handle & Pulser) J18 - Options (RS485)
J4 - Product 3 (Handle & Pulser) J19 - Console Communication
J5 - Interface Bd. J20 - Battery
J6 - Computer Bd. J21 - Product 1 Valve Control
J7 - Multiplex / Blend Control Bd. J22 - Display Board, Side A
J8 - Relay #2 / Valve Interface Bd. J23 - Display Board, Side B
J9 - Relay #1 Bd. J24 - Interface Bd.
J10 - Product 4 Valve Control J25 - Computer Bd.
J11 - Product 2 (Handle & Pulser) J26 - Multiplex / Blend Control Bd.
J12 - Product 4 (Handle & Pulser) J27 - Relay #2 / Valve Interface Bd.
J13 - Multiplex / Blend Control Bd. J28 - Relay #1 Bd.
J14 - Product 3 Valve Control J29 - Motor Control
J15 - Product 2 Valve Control J30 - Intercom Button (see pages 3-5 and 4-4
CB1 - Battery Circuit Breaker for additional information)
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-3
System Circuit Boards
Mother Board - 420935 (continued)
J1 Transformer Input Connector
1 Transformer secondary
2 Transformer secondary
This list of
Voltage = 8.5 – 14 VAC between pins 1 and 2
connector
functions excludes J2 Valve AC Input Connector
the Mother Board 1 AC hot
edge connectors. 2 AC common
Voltage = 102 – 132 VAC between pins 1 and 2 for 110 volt operation
Voltage = 204 – 264 VAC between pins 1 and 2 for 220 volt operation
J3, J4, J11, J12 Products (respectively) 1, 3, 2, and 4
Pulser/Handle Connector
1 Handle signal for side A of the product
2 Phase 0 , side A pulser for the product
3 Phase 90, side A pulser for the product
4 Side A pulser voltage (4.75 – 5.25 VDC)
5 Handle signal for side B of the product
6 Phase 0, side B pulser for the product
7 Phase 90, side B pulser for the product
All of the ground
8 Side B pulser voltage (4.75 – 5.25 VDC)
signals (9 – 12) are
9 Ground signal for side A Handle circuit
tied to the same
10 Ground signal for side A Pulser circuit
ground on the PC
11 Ground signal for side B Handle circuit
board.
12 Ground signal for side B Pulser circuit
J10, J14, J15, J21 Products 4, 3, 2, and 1 Valve Control
Connectors (120 or 220 VAC)
1 Side A slow flow valve control
2 Side A full flow valve control
3 AC common for side A valves
4 Side B slow flow valve control
5 Side B full flow valve control
6 AC common for side B valves
All valve signals for side A and side B are on the same connector. Valve
controls can be exchanged with other products to aid troubleshooting.
J29 Motor Control Connector (120 or 220 VAC)
1 AC hot for motor 1
2 AC hot for motor 2
3 AC hot for motor 3
4 AC hot for motor 4
These signals energize a 120/220 VAC motor contactor coil circuit with a
maximum current of .5 Amperes

J16, J17 DPT1, DPT2 Communications Connectors


1 Not used
2 Not used
3 RS485 communication (positive side)
4 RS485 communication (negative side)
5 System DCC
6 System DCC

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-4 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
System Circuit Boards
Mother Board - 420935 (continued)
J18 Options RS485 Communication Connector
1 RS485 communication (negative side)
2 System DCC
3 RS485 communication (positive side)

J19 Console Communications Connector


1 Talk to dispenser signal (TTD)
2 System DCC
3 Talk to console signal (TTC)
To troubleshoot, disconnect J19. The TTD signal should measure 10.8 – 13.2
VDC. If the TTC signal is grounded, LED 1 (yellow) on the Interface board
will light.

J20 Battery Pack Connector


1 Positive battery voltage (8.5 – 10.5 VDC)
2 System DCC

J22, J23 Display Board Side A and Side B Connectors


1 Keypad matrix, row 1 for side A, row 5 for side B
2 Keypad matrix, row 2 for side A, row 6 for side B
3 Keypad matrix, row 3 for side A, row 7 for side B
4 Keypad matrix, row 4 for side A, row 8 for side B
5 Keypad matrix, column 1
6 Keypad matrix, column 2
7 Keypad matrix, column 3
8 Keypad matrix, column 4
9 Keypad matrix, column 5
10 Keypad matrix, column 6
11 Keypad matrix, column 7
12 Keypad matrix, column 8
13 Serial display data
14 Display clock signal
15 Load data signal for the display on the appropriate side
16 No Connection
17 +12 VDC to display board 5 volt regulator (10.8 – 13.2 VDC)
18 +12 VDC to display board 5 volt regulator (10.8 – 13.2 VDC)
19 System DCC
20 System DCC

J30 Intercom Button Output


1 Common terminal of “call switch”
2 Normally closed side of “call switch”
3 Normally open side of “call switch”
This connector is used to connect the Intercom push button circuit in the
junction box. Exact wiring to the intercom varies by manufacturer.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 3-5
System Circuit Boards
Interface Board - 421087 (Premier B & C)
• Pulser filtering circuit
• Pulser connect sensing circuit
• Power Supply
• Battery charging and testing circuit
• AC Power detect circuitry
• External interfaces
- TTC/TTD (Tokheim serial interface)
- RS-485 serial interface (DPT)
- Display data signals (data, clock, load)

JU1 - BATTERY CHARGER


SET POINT JUMPER
SW1 - START UP / DISPENSER POWER DOWN TP2 - 14 PIN TEST
SWITCH (ALSO CALLED THE CONTROL BUTTON) POINT HEADER R13 - BATTERY
CHARGER SET
POINT ADJUST
TP1 - SYSTEM GROUND PIN #14 PIN #1 RESISTOR

LED’S 1-4

LED1 - TALK TO
CONSOLE (TTC)

LED2 - TALK TO
DISPENSER (TTD)

LED3 - RS-485 (RXD)

LED4 - RS-485 (TXD)

J1 - CONNECTS TO MOTHER BOARD J5 J2 - CONNECTS TO MOTHER BOARD J24

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-6 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
System Circuit Boards
Interface Board - 421087 (continued)
TP2
TP2 Test Point Header Signals TP2 Test Point Header Signals
Pin Pin
Signal Present Signal Present
# #
1 DCC (DC Common) 8 +5 VDC (pulser) Acceptable range: 4.75 - 5.25 VDC

2 Factory Use Only 9 +VDC1 (rectified & filtered) Acceptable range: 8.5 - 15 VDC

3 +V BAT (Battery voltage) range: 8 - 11 VDC 10 TXD RS-485 transmit data signal (TTL level)

4 +5 VDC (System voltage) range: 4.75 - 5.25 VDC 11 RXD RS-485 receive data signal (TTL level)

5 +12 VDC (Communication voltage) range: 10.8 - 13.2 VDC 12 TTC Talk To Console (Tokheim serial link) +12 VDC level

6 VBB (Battery backup voltage) range: 4.75 - 5.25 VDC 13 TTD Talk to Dispenser (Tokheim serial link) +12 VDC level

7 VREF (Pulser Op Amp circuit) range: 2.462 - 2.538 VDC 14 +8 VDC Multiplex bd. power, Acceptable range: 7 - 11 VDC

LED Indicators
Used for LED 1 This yellow LED flashes on when communications are going to
dispenser/console
communications { LED 2
the console (TTC)
This green LED flashes on when communications are going to
the dispenser (TTD)
LED3 This green LED flashes on when the Interface board is receiving
Used for DPT &
options
communications
{ LED4
internal RS-485 data (RXD)
This red LED flashes on when the Interface board is transmitting
internal RS-485 data (TXD)
SW1
The Start Up / Battery Power Down Switch (Control Button)
! WARNING Switch SW1 is the start up switch for the Premier dispenser. All nozzles must
The dispenser may be in their boots, and the dispenser must not be in manager mode. When
still have dangerous pushed and held in at power up:
voltages inside! Shut • All software variables default values are initialized
off all circuit breakers • Totals and prices are NOT cleared
to the dispenser!
When pushed while operating on battery power, the dispenser electronics will
power down.
R13
The battery charge voltage must be checked anytime any of the following
occurs:
• Low battery indication • Battery replacement
• Interface board replacement • Preventative maintenance
Setting the Battery Charge Voltage
1. Disconnect the battery from mother board connector J20.
2. Put a two pin jumper across pins 1 and 2 of JU1.
3. Monitor TP2, pin 3 (VBAT) and adjust R13 until TP2, pin 3 is
8.8VDC.
4. Remove the jumper from JU1.
5. Reconnect the battery pack connector to mother board connector J20.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 3-7
System Circuit Boards
Expanded Computer Board - 421124 (Premier B & C)
The Expanded Computer (CPU) board processes and controls the majority of
the dispenser functions. The operating program is stored in the EPROM (U5)
on the board.
• Four diagnostic LEDs
• 14 pin edge mounted test points
• 8K x 8 nonvolatile static RAM with internal battery
TP1 TP2 - DC COMMON
14-PIN TEST POINT HEADER
DIAGNOSTIC LED 1, 2, 3, 4
PIN 1

U5
EPROM

1 2 34 5 6 7 8

SW1 - DIP SWITCH 1

Diagnostic LEDS:
LED #1: Watchdog ON
LED #2: Any motor ON
LED #3: Any valve ON
LED #4: AC Power present

J1 - CONNECTS TO MOTHER BD. J6 J2 - CONNECTS TO MOTHER BD. J25

TP1 - Test Point 1 Pinouts


PIN # DESCRIPTION PIN # DESCRIPTION

1 DC Common 8 Dip Switch position #1


DIP SWITCH
POSITIONS 2 Not used at this time 9 Dip Switch position #2
OFF = 5 volts
ON = 0 volts 3 +5 VDC 10 Dip Switch position #3

4 Future diagnostic #4 11 Dip Switch position #4

5 Future diagnostic #3 12 Dip Switch position #5

6 Future diagnostic #2 13 Dip Switch position #6

7 Future diagnostic #1 14 Dip Switch position #7

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-8 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
System Circuit Boards
Expanded Computer Board - 421124
SW1 Setting the DIP Switch
Dip Switch SW1 settings are used to configure the Expanded Computer
Board to the dispenser. This switch is a rocker-type switch. Push down on the
desired selection (on or off). The dispenser will not detect changes in SW1
settings until you do one of the following:
• Enter manager mode 14 or higher
• Power up the dispenser while pressing the control button on
the Interface board
• Lift handle #1 on side A only and power up the dispenser
while pressing the control button on the Interface board (cold
start power up routine)

SWITCH STATUS DESCRIPTION


Sales halt if the console communication is interrupted for
ON more than 1/2 second. The console operator can resume
the sale after the communication has been reestablishied.
1
OFF Sales will not halt if console communication is interrupted.

For use with VISION, MEMS IV, MEMS V, VX100,


ON
VXDHC, and model 83 DHC dispenser controllers.
2
For use with the MEMS II, and MEMS III consoles which
OFF
only use 1 price per product.

ON Unit of volume is GALLONS.


3
OFF Unit of volume is LITERS.

Blanking of first 0.009 gallons or 0.034 liters (hose


ON
dilation).
4
Calibration, no blanking. For blenders, this disables all
OFF
pulser and blend control related errors.

ON Simultaneous programming for dispenser sides A and B.


5
OFF Independent programming for dispenser sides A and B.

ON Dual phase pulser operation.


6
OFF Single phase operation (phase 0 only).

Ignores the console slow flow offset. Uses setting from


ON
mode F18.
7
Uses the console slow flow offset value, not more than 2.5
OFF
units.

ON Not used.
8
OFF Used for all Premier dispensers.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 3-9
System Circuit Boards
Multiplex Board - 417333 (not used in blenders)
Premier B & C
• Communicates the status of nozzle sensors to the Expanded
CPU board
This is the same • Selects the proper pulsers, and outputs them to the Interface
Multiplex board board
used in the TCSA • Selects the proper valve and motor circuits to activate the
series dispensers.
relays on the Relay board

• •

TO MOTHER BD J7 TO MOTHER BD J13 TO MOTHER BD J26

K1 - PRODUCT 1, SIDE A PULSER K6 - PRODUCT 1, SIDE B PULSER


K2 - PRODUCT 2, SIDE A PULSER K7 - PRODUCT 2, SIDE B PULSER
K3 - PRODUCT 3, SIDE A PULSER K8 - PRODUCT 3, SIDE B PULSER
K4 - PRODUCT 4, SIDE A PULSER K9 - PRODUCT 4, SIDE B PULSER
K5 - NOT USED K10 - NOT USED

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-10 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
System Circuit Boards
Relay Board - 421084 (Premier B & C)
• Contains the solid state relays that control the 120 VAC (or
240 VAC) to the valves and motor control lines
• 8 VDC from the Interface board is the supply voltage used to
Blenders only use power the solid state relays. The ON/OFF operation of the
Relay Board # 1. relays is controlled by the Multiplex board
Up to two Relay boards can be used in Premier dispensers:
• Board 1 for products 1 & 2 connects to J9 & J28 on the
Mother board and is a fully-populated circuit board
• Board 2 for product 3 (only) connects to J8 & J27 on the
Mother board and is a half-populated circuit board
• Board 2 for products 3 & 4 connects to J8 & J27 on the
Mother board and is a fully-populated circuit board, identical
to Board 1
• Blending dispensers use only Relay board # 1

Number of Number Number of Number


Boards Req'd Boards Req'd
Products of Sides Products of Sides

2 1 1 Full 3 2 1 Full, 1 Half

2 2 1 Full 4 1 2 Full

3 1 1 Full, 1 Half 4 2 2 Full

This chart is for troubleshooting


purposes only! It is not intended
for component replacement.
U2
Solid State
Function Controlled*
Relay #
U2 Motor 1 or Motor 3

U3 Slow Flow Valve A1 or A3

U4 Full Flow Valve A1 or A3

U5 Slow Flow Valve B1 or B3

U6 Full Flow Valve B1 or B3

U8 Motor 2 or Motor 4

U9 Slow Flow Valve A2 or A4

U10 Full Flow Valve A2 or A4

U11 Slow Flow Valve B2 or B4


U12
U12 Full Flow Valve B2 or B4

*Depending on which card cage slot the *CONNECTS TO J8 OR J9 *CONNECTS TO J27 OR


board is installed into ON MOTHER BD. J28 ON MOTHER BD.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 3-11
System Circuit Boards
AC Distribution Board - 420955 (Premier B & C)
• Includes system thermostats for lights, electronics, and heater
• Circuit breaker protection for the electronics
• Located on the back side of the card cage

AC Distribution Wiring
Schematic available
on page 3-16.

TS2 - HEATER THERMOSTAT,


OPENS @ 20°C (68°F)
J2 - SURGE/SPIKE J4 - 220 VAC
PROTECTION J3 - AC
NOISE FILTER J5 - 120 VAC

J1 - MAIN AC SWITCH
TS1 - TRANSFORMER
J7 - HEATER THERMOSTAT, OPENS
@ 80°C (176°F)

CB1 - CIRCUIT
TS2 BREAKER (FOR THE
J6 - FAN ELECTRONICS ONLY)
.2 AMP

J9 - RELAY POWER
J8 - AC INPUT

J14 - OPTION TS3 - LIGHTS


POWER SUPPLY THERMOSTAT,
OPENS @ 70°C
(158°F)

J10 - AC OPTION #1 (FILTERED) J16 - MAIN LIGHTS (DISPLAY BD. BACKLIGHTS)


J11 - AC OPTION #2 (FILTERED) J17 - DPT LIGHTS
J12 - AC OPTION #3 (FILTERED)
J13 - AC SPARE (UNFILTERED)

Connectors of the AC Distribution Board

J1 To Main AC Switch
1 Switched side of ACH (hot) for the relays and motor control signals
2 Input side of ACH for the relays and motor control signals
3 Input side of ACH
4 Switched side of ACH
Pins 1 & 2 are switched separately to keep voltage from other dispensers in
the station from feeding back and keeping the dispenser powered up.
This connector controls AC going to the relays, UDCB transformer, power
supply, and AC Options #1, #2, and #3.
Switch rating = 10A @ 120VAC, 5A @ 220 VAC.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-12 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
Connectors of the AC Distribution Board (continued)

J2 Surge Protection Connector


1 & 3 ACC side of surge and spike protector
2 & 5 Earth ground for the surge and spike protector
4 & 6 ACH side of the surge and spike protector
Spike protection for 120 VAC operation begins at 403 VAC.

J3 AC Filter Connector
1 ACC input to filter from the surge protector
2, 5 Earth ground
3 Filtered ACC output
4 ACH input to filter from the surge protector
6 Filtered ACH output
AC filter rating = 10A @ 120 VAC / 220 VAC

J4 220 Volt Transformer Connector


1 No external connection, this is tied to pin 4 for 220 VAC operation
2 Filtered ACC to the transformer
3 Filtered ACH to the transformer
4 No external connection, this is tied to pin 1 for 220 VAC operation
Thermostat TS1 shuts off power to the transformer above 80°C/176°F.

J5 120 Volt Transformer Connector


1 & 3 Filtered ACC to the transformer
2 & 4 Filtered ACH to the transformer
Both 120 VAC and 220 VAC dispensers use the same transformer.
Thermostat TS1 shuts off power to the transformer above 80°C/176°F.

J6 Fan Connector
1 ACH to the fan
2 ACC to the fan
A different fan assembly is required for 220 VAC operation.

J7 Heater Connector
1 ACH for the heater from TS2 thermostat
2 ACC for the heater
The thermostat TS2 opens above 20°C/68°F shutting off power to the heater.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-13
System Circuit Boards
Connectors of the AC Distribution Board (continued)

J8 AC Input Connector
1 ACC for the dispenser
2 & 3 Earth ground
4 Spare ACC (unfiltered, no spike protection)
5 ACH for the dispenser
6 ACH for all dispenser lights
7 ACC for all dispenser lights
8 Spare ACH (unfiltered, no spike protection)
Typically, the spare ACH and ACC are not connected in the connection box.

J9 Relay Power Connector


1 ACH for valve and motor control
2 ACC for valve and motor control
This power is switched by the main power switch to prevent other dispensers
providing power feedback.

J10, J11, J12 AC Option 1, AC Option 2, and AC Option 3


1 Filtered ACH for dispenser options
2 Filtered ACC for dispenser options
3 Earth ground for dispenser options
Total maximum current draw for all three options is 5A @ 120 VAC.
Thermostat TS1 will shut off power to these options above 80°C/176°F.

J13 AC Spare Connector (currently used for Valance lights)


1 Unfiltered ACH for dispenser options
2 Unfiltered ACC for dispenser options
3 Earth ground for dispenser options
Note that this is UNFILTERED AC power

J14 Option Power Supply Connector


1 ACH to the cash acceptor
2 ACC to the cash acceptor
3 & 6 Earth ground
4 ACH to the DPT & Blender
5 ACC to the DPT & Blender
Thermostat TS1 will shut off power to these options above 80°C/176°F.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-14 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
Connectors of the AC Distribution Board (continued)

J15 Product Lights Connector (future option)


1 ACH for product ID lights on side A
2 ACC for product ID lights on side A
3 & 6 Earth ground
4 ACH for product ID lights on side B
5 ACC for product ID lights on side B
Thermostat TS3 controls ACH to the lights. ACH is shut off when the
dispenser head temperature rises above 70°C/158°F.
A separate AC circuit for the lights (from the station to the dispenser) allows
station lighting independent from dispenser lighting.
A different ballast assembly is required for 220 VAC operation.

J16 Main Lights Connector (Backlights for the Display board)


1 ACH for the main display lights on side A
2 ACC for the main display lights on side A
3 & 6 Earth ground
4 ACH for the main display lights on side B
5 ACC for the main display lights on side B
Thermostat TS3 shuts off power to these lights above 70°C/158°F.
A separate circuit for these lights provides an independent lighting scheme
for the station.
A different ballast assembly is required for 220 VAC operation.

J17, J18 DPT Lights Connector, Valance Lights Connector


(future option)
1 ACH for the DPT lights or valance lights on side A
2 ACC for the DPT lights or valance lights on side A
3 & 6 Earth ground
4 ACH for the DPT lights or valance lights on side B
5 ACC for the DPT lights or valance lights on side B
Thermostat TS3 shuts off power to these lights above 70°C/158°F.
A separate circuit for these lights provides an independent lighting scheme
for the station.
A different ballast assembly is required for 220 VAC operation.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-15
System Circuit Boards
AC Distribution Wiriring Schematic (Premier B & C)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-16 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
Blend Control Board - 421574 (Premier B & C)

• Used only in Blend dispensers


• Calculates blending ratio
• Receives pulser and handle signals
• Monitors for pulser disconnect
• Controls motors, blending valves, and dual-flow valves
• Receives commands from and reports status to the master
processor on the Expanded Computer Board
• Supplies Motor Control for MaxVac system
• 421186 (for non MaxVac)

J4 MaxVac Interface Connector (MaxVac is optional)


1 Pulser 1A 6 No Connection
2 Pulser 2A 7 Error Side A
3 No Connection 8 Error side B
4 Pulser 1B 9 +5 VDC
5 Pulser 2B 10 DCC

J4

TO MOTHER BD J7 TO MOTHER BD J13 TO MOTHER BD J26

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-17
System Circuit Boards
Valve Interface Board - 421284 (Premier B & C)

• Used only in Blend dispensers


• controls ASCO blending valve solenoids
• contains motor control signals
• polarized and locking connectors
• optically isolated from system

J1 DC signals J2 AC signals
J3 +24 VDC valve power J4 Inlet valve 1A
J5 Outlet valve 1A J6 Inlet valve 2A
J7 Outlet valve 2A J8 Inlet valve 1B
J9 Outlet valve 1B J10 Inlet valve 2B
J11 Outlet valve 2B

J3 VALVE POWER (FROM OPTIONS P.S.) VALVE SIGNALS FOR J4 THRU J11
1 +24V 1A 5 +24V 1B 1 GROUND SIDE OF VALVE CONTROL
2 GND 1A 6 GND 1B 2 +24V SIDE OF VALVE CONTROL
3&4 NO CONNECTION
3 +24V 2A 7 +24V 2B
4 GND 2A 8 GND 2B

CONNECTS TO MOTHER BD J8 CONNECTS TO MOTHER BD J27

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-18 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
Options Power Supply (Premier B & C)
Assembly 319407-8, PC Board 420949
• Used only with a DPT, Blender, or Cash Acceptor
• The Options Power Supply is required if a DPT, Blender, or
Cash Acceptor is installed.
• The power supply is located to the right of the cardcage on
side A.
• Turn power on and off to DPTs using the power switches.

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
BLENDERS ONLY 24V SIDE A
BLENDER POWER
OUTPUT CONNECTOR
24V SIDE B
(TO THE VALVE
INTERFACE BOARD)
8V SIDES A & B

POWER SWITCHES CASH ACCEPTOR


SIDES A & B
DPT SIDE A

LED'S
DPT SIDE B
24V SIDE A, 24V SIDE B

8V, 24V

OPTIONS POWER 8V, 24V


SUPPLY ASSEMBLY LED "ON" INDICATES THAT
THE DESCRIBED POWER
LEVEL IS ACTIVE

OPTIONS POWER
SUPPLY PC BOARD
CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION
J1 BLENDER POWER OUTPUT
J2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
J3 DPT POWER OUTPUT
J4 CASH ACCEPTOR POWER OUTPUT
J5 AC INPUT CONNECTOR
J6 TRANSFORMER SECONDARIES
J7 110 VAC TRANSFORMER PRIMARIES
J8 220 VAC TRANSFORMER PRIMARY

Options Power Supply Board


Connectors are described in
detail on the next page.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-19
System Circuit Boards
Options Power Supply Board Connectors
J1 Blend Valve Power - Supplies 24VDC for Blend Valves
1 DCC 5 DCC
2 DCC 6 DCC
3 +24V side B 7 +24V side A
4 +24V side B 8 +24V side A

J2 Circuit Breakers - Connection to circuit breakers


1 Cash Acceptor IN 6 24 VAC secondary 2 IN
2 Cash Acceptor OUT 7 24 VAC secondary 2 OUT
3 24 VAC secondary 1 IN 8 8.5 VAC secondary 3 IN
4 24 VAC secondary 1 OUT 9 8.5 VAC secondary 3 OUT
5 No Connection

J3 DPT Out - 24 VDC and 8VDC to DPT CPU Bds


1 +24 VDC power for DPT side B (23.5 – 24.5 VDC, supplies power for
printer, paper cutter, and beeper)
2 +8 VDC power for DPT side B (unregulated, for +5 VDC logic power)
3 DCC
4 +24 VDC power for DPT side A (23.5 – 24.5 VDC, supplies power for
printer, paper cutter, and beeper)
5 +8 VDC power for DPT side A (unregulated, for +5 VDC logic power)
6 DCC

J4 Cash Out - Supplies AC power for side A and B cash acceptors


1 ACH for side A cash acceptor 2 ACC for side A cash acceptor
3 ACH for side B cash acceptor 4 ACC for side B cash acceptor

J5 Main AC In - AC power input from AC Distribution Bd


1 ACH Input for cash acceptors side A and B
2 ACC Input for cash acceptors side A and B
3 Earth Ground (connected to DCC at board standoff)
4 No Connection
5 No Connection
6 No Connection
7 ACH Input for DPT and Blend Valve power sides A and B
8 ACC Input for DPT and Blend Valve power sides A and B
9 Earth Ground (connected to DCC at board standoff)

J6 Transformer Sec - Connection for transformer secondaries


1 Secondary 3 return 4 Secondary 2, 24 to 36 VAC
2 Secondary 3, 8 to 12 VAC 5 Secondary 1 return
3 Secondary 2 return 6 Secondary 1, 24 to 36 VAC

J7 110 VAC Transformer Pri - Connection for 110 VAC primaries


1 ACH Primary 1 3 ACH Primary 2
2 ACC primary 1 4 ACC primary 2
ACH range = 102 – 132 VAC

J8 220 VAC Transformer Pri - Connection for 220 VAC primary.


1 ACH (204 to 264 VAC)
2 Connects dual primaries in series
3 Connects dual primaries in series
4 ACC
Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
3-20 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
LED Board - 421228 (Premier B)
• One LED board for all single-hosed dispensers
• Locking and polarized connector

CONNECTOR J1 IS
LOCATED ON THE
BACKSIDE OF THE
BOARD.

Control for the LED board comes from J7 on the Display board. A current
limiting resistor for each LED is on the display board as well. The schematic
for the LED board is below.

J1
PIN 2 +5VDC

PIN 1 -LED1 LED1

PIN 3 -LED2 LED2

PIN 4 -LED3 LED3

PIN 5 -LED4 LED4

PIN 6 - LED5 LED5

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-21
System Circuit Boards
Display Board - 420942
(Premier B, used in models with beeper in electronics
enclosure)

• All connectors are the locking type and are polarized


• Full keypad matrix (Product Selection & Operator Interface
keypads, Manager and Arming keys)
• Beeper circuit and connector (J5)
• Jumper configured at the factory for 1 to 5 Price displays
• +5 VDC regulator on board for all display voltages

MAGNETIC KEY
SENSORS

MONEY AND VOLUME DISPLAY

PRICE
(PPUV) PPUV1 PPUV2 PPUV3 PPUV4 PPUV5
DISPLAYS
(1-5)

J5 - BEEPER
J1- INPUT
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR CONFIGURATION
J6 - ALTERNATIVE JUMPERS J7 - LED BOARD
J2 - OPERATOR (FACTORY
MANAGER/ARMING CONTROL CONNECTOR
INTERFACE CONFIGURED)
KEY CONNECTOR
KEYPAD
J4 - PRODUCT 6 CONNECTOR
J3 - PRODUCT
(FUTURE USE)
SELECTION
J8 - PRODUCTION KEYPAD
TEST CONNECTOR

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-22 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
Display Board - 421437
(Premier B, used in models with beeper in raceway)
• All connectors are the locking type and are polarized
• Full keypad matrix (Product Selection & Operator Interface
keypads, Manager and Arming keys)
• Beeper connectors for dispenser electronics (J5) and
DPT (J9)
• Jumper configured at the factory for 1 to 5 Price displays
• +5 VDC regulator on board for all display voltages

MAGNETIC KEY
SENSORS

MONEY AND VOLUME DISPLAY

PRICE PPUV1 PPUV2 PPUV3 PPUV4 PPUV5


(PPUV)
DISPLAYS
(1-5)

J5 - BEEPER
J1- INPUT CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
J6 - ALTERNATIVE
J2 - OPERATOR J9 - DPT
MANAGER/ARMING
INTERFACE BEEPER
KEY CONNECTOR
KEYPAD CONNECTOR
J3 - PRODUCT
SELECTION J7 - LED BOARD
J8 - PRODUCTION KEYPAD
TEST CONNECTOR CONTROL CONNECTOR

J4 - PRODUCT 6 CONNECTOR
(FUTURE USE)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-23
System Circuit Boards
Display Board Connectors (Premier B)
All connectors except J9 are used on both display boards (420942 &
421437). Display board 420942 does not have connector J9.
All “Row” numbers in parenthesis ( ) are for side B.

J1 Input Connector J3 Product Selection Keypad


1 Row 1 (5) of the keypad matrix 1 Row 1 (5) of the keypad matrix
2 Row 2 (6) of the keypad matrix 2 Row 2 (6) of the keypad matrix
3 Row 3 (7) of the keypad matrix 3 Row 3 (7) of the keypad matrix
4 Row 4 (8) of the keypad matrix 4 Row 4 (8) of the keypad matrix
5 Column 1 of the keypad matrix 5 Column 7 of the keypad matrix
6 Column 2 of the keypad matrix 6 Column 8 of the keypad matrix
7 Column 3 of the keypad matrix
8 Column 4 of the keypad matrix J4 Product 6 - Not used
9 Column 5 of the keypad matrix
J5 Dispenser Beeper
10 Column 6 of the keypad matrix
1 12 VDC from Interface board
11 Column 7 of the keypad matrix (10.8 - 13.2)
12 Column 8 of the keypad matrix 2, 3 No connection
13 Serial data from Interface board 4 Beeper control signal, low = on
14 Clock signal from Interface board
15 Load signal from Interface board J6 Spare Manager/Arming Key
16 No connection 1 Row 3 of switch matrix
17, 18 12 VDC from Interface bd. 2, 3 Column 8 of switch matrix
(10.8 - 13.2) 4 Row 4 of switch matrix
19, 20 System ground
J7 LED Board Control
J2 Operator Interface Keypad Connector 1 On/off control for LED 1, low = on
1 Row 1 (5) of keypad matrix 3 On/off control for LED 2, low = on
2 Row 2 (6) of the keypad matrix 5 On/off control for LED 3, low = on
3 Row 3 (7) of the keypad matrix 7 On/off control for LED 4, low = on
4 Row 4 (8) of the keypad matrix 9 On/off control for LED 5, low = on
5 Column 1 of the keypad matrix 11 On/off control for LED 6, low = on
6 Column 2 of the keypad matrix (Even numbered pins are 5 VDC to LED Bd.)
7 Column 3 of the keypad matrix
J8 Production Test (Factory use only)
8 Column 4 of the keypad matrix
9 Column 5 of the keypad matrix
J9 DPT Beeper
10 Column 6 of the keypad matrix
1 12 VDC from DPT when active
2 Ground from DPT when active
Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
3-24 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
Display Board - 422594 (Premier C)
• All connectors are the locking type and are polarized
• Full keypad matrix (Product Selection & Operator Interface
keypads, Manager and Arming keys)
• Beeper circuit and connector (J5)
• Jumper configured at the factory for 1 to 5 Price displays
• +5 VDC regulator on board for all display voltages

MAGNETIC KEY
FRONT SIDE SENSORS

PPUV1 PPUV2 PPUV3 PPUV4 PPUV5

422594.PLT
BACK SIDE J8 -
PRODUCTION
TEST
CONNECTOR

J6 - J9 - DPT
ALTERNATIVE BEEPER
MANAGER/ CONNECTOR
ARMING KEY
CONNECTOR
J5 - BEEPER
CONNECTOR

J3

J2 - OPERATOR J1- INPUT J3 - PRODUCT


INTERFACE CONNECTOR SELECTION
KEYPAD KEYPAD

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-25
System Circuit Boards
Display Board Connectors (Premier C)

All “Row” numbers in parenthesis ( ) are for side B.

J1 Input Connector J3 Product Selection Keypad


1 Row 1 (5) of the keypad matrix 1 Row 1 (5) of the keypad matrix
2 Row 2 (6) of the keypad matrix 2 Row 2 (6) of the keypad matrix
3 Row 3 (7) of the keypad matrix 3 Row 3 (7) of the keypad matrix
4 Row 4 (8) of the keypad matrix 4 Row 4 (8) of the keypad matrix
5 Column 1 of the keypad matrix 5 Column 7 of the keypad matrix
6 Column 2 of the keypad matrix 6 Column 8 of the keypad matrix
7 Column 3 of the keypad matrix
8 Column 4 of the keypad matrix
9 Column 5 of the keypad matrix J5 Dispenser Beeper
10 Column 6 of the keypad matrix 1 12 VDC from Interface board
11 Column 7 of the keypad matrix (10.8 - 13.2)
12 Column 8 of the keypad matrix 2, 3 No connection
13 Serial data from Interface board 4 Beeper control signal, low = on
14 Clock signal from Interface board
15 Load signal from Interface board
16 No connection J6 Alternative Manager/Arming Key
17, 18 12 VDC from Interface bd. 1 Row 3 of switch matrix
(10.8 - 13.2)
2, 3 Column 8 of switch matrix
19, 20 System ground
4 Row 4 of switch matrix

J2 Operator Interface Keypad Connector


1 Row 1 (5) of the keypad matrix J8 Production Test (Factory use only)
2 Row 2 (6) of the keypad matrix
3 Row 3 (7) of the keypad matrix
4 Row 4 (8) of the keypad matrix J9 DPT Beeper
5 Column 1 of the keypad matrix 1 12 VDC from DPT when active
6 Column 2 of the keypad matrix 2 Ground from DPT when active
7 Column 3 of the keypad matrix
8 Column 4 of the keypad matrix
9 Column 5 of the keypad matrix
10 Column 6 of the keypad matrix

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-26 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
System Circuit Boards
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Assembly - 321139
(Premier C)
• The intrinsically safe barrier assembly replaces the pulser/
The Intrinsically Safe handle barrier pipes that are used in the Premier B series
Barrier Assembly does dispensers.
not have any serviceable • Connector pins are defined in Section 4 of this manual.
parts and must be
replaced as an
assembly.

TO MOTHERBOARD
(SEE CONFIGURATIONS
ON NEXT PAGE)

INTRINSICALLY SAFE
BARRIER ASSEMBLY

TO HANDLES &
PULSERS (SEE
CONFIGURATIONS
ON NEXT PAGE)

TOP VIEW

INTRINSICALLY SAFE
BARRIER ASSEMBLY

BOTTOM VIEW

See next page for handle


and pulser connectors
configurations. The
OR locations for plugging in
the harnesses depend on
the configuration of the
assembly that you have.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 3-27
System Circuit Boards
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Assembly (continued)
(Premier C)

Handle and Pulser Connectors Configurations

BLUE/GREEN ORANGE/YELLOW
RED/BROWN VIOLET/GRAY
WIRING WIRING

TOP VIEW TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW BOTTOM VIEW

BLUE/GREEN RED/BROWN VIOLET ORANGE


WIRING WIRING WIRING WIRING
ORANGE/ VIOLET/GRAY BLUE/GREEN RED/BROWN
YELLOW WIRING WIRING WIRING
WIRING

TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

BLUE/GREEN WIRING RED/BROWN WIRING

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


3-28 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Wiring Diagrams

Section 4: Wiring Diagrams


Scope
This section provides various wiring diagrams for Premier B and C
series dispensers. These diagrams can be used to trace signals throughout a
Wiring diagrams are dispenser.
not included for Section 4 Contents
every conceivable H426B-S Suction (Premier B) ........................................................ 4-2
pump wiring H428B-S Suction (Premier B) ........................................................ 4-3
configuration, but are H311B/H312B/H322B/H324B-S Suction (Premier B) .................... 4-4
provided as Intercom Speaker Wiring (Premier B) ............................................ 4-5
a reference Intercom Speaker Wiring (Premier C) ........................................... 4-6
Electronics Block Diagram (Premier C) ......................................... 4-7
Electronics Block Diagram (Premier B) ......................................... 4-8
H413B-R (Premier B) .................................................................... 4-9
H426B-R (Premier B) .................................................................. 4-10
H311B/H322B/H324B-R (Premier B) ............................................ 4-11
H428B-R (Premier B) .................................................................. 4-12
H413B-REB (Premier B) ............................................................. 4-13
H426B-REB (Premier B) ............................................................. 4-14
H322B-B3/B5 (Premier B) ........................................................... 4-15
AC Distribution Board Block Diagram (Premier B) ...................... 4-16
Premier B System Wiring Diagrams
Mother Board ........................................................................ 4-17
Pump Handles & Pulsers - H428B-S .................................... 4-18
Pump Handles & Pulsers ...................................................... 4-19
Motors & Valves - H428B-S .................................................. 4-20
Motors & Valves .................................................................... 4-21
Displays ................................................................................ 4-22
AC Distribution ...................................................................... 4-23
Options Power Supply .......................................................... 4-24
Connection Box ..................................................................... 4-24
Dispenser Payment Terminal (DPT) ...................................... 4-25
INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal - H324B ................... 4-26
INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal - H426B ................... 4-27
INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal - H426-REB ............. 4-28
INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal - H428B-R ............... 4-29
MaxVac System Wiring Diagram for Non-Blend Dispensers . 4-30
MaxVac System Wiring Diagram for Blending Dispensers .... 4-31
Premier C System Wiring Diagrams
System Wiring Diagram ........................................................ 4-32
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (H300 Series) ...................... 4-33
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (H400 Series) ...................... 4-34
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (H400 Series) ...................... 4-35
Displays ................................................................................ 4-36
AC Distribution ...................................................................... 4-37
MaxVac Vapor Recovery ....................................................... 4-38
Standard DPT ....................................................................... 4-39
Debit DPT ............................................................................. 4-40
INSIGHT DPT ....................................................................... 4-41
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-1
Wiring Diagrams

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
H426B-S (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-2 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
H428B-S (Premier B)

320812s6.plt

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-3
Wiring Diagrams
H311B-S, H312B-S, H322B-S & H324B-S (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-4 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
Intercom Speaker Wiring (Premier B)

Side B
1234
1234 INTERCOM JUNCTION BOX
1234
1234
1234

The Intercom speaker junction box is a round junction box located inside the
dispenser in the lower right corner of Side B. To access this junction box, see
Connection Box Access, in Section 2. The intercom connections should be
based upon the manufacturer’s specifications.

Speaker wires Blue is Speaker+


inside the Junction box: Violet is Speaker-

J30 on Mother board: Brown is Common


(call button) Red is Normally closed
Orange is Normally open

This J30 connector is an output to the intercom for the call button. In order
for a call button to be part of the operator interface keypad, this circuitry
must be used for the “call” signal.

The operator interface keypad call button (if used) is software controlled.
The call button must be programmed to the appropriate keypad button of the
operator interface keypad. This is done by using Mode F29. The keycode
for the call button is “cb”. For additional information on programming the
keypads, please refer to the Programming/Operating Manual, Form 4816, for
Premier B.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-5
Wiring Diagrams
Intercom/Speaker Wiring (Premier C)
The intercom/speaker wires should be connected based on the intercom
manufacturer's specification. Intercom/speaker field wires will be joined
together with the dispenser intercom/speaker wires in the dispenser
connection box.
There are no
connections to the The dispenser call button switch is software controlled. To use the call
terminal strip in the button, program the appropriate keypad button on the operator interface
connection box for keypad. This button is programmed in Mode F29. The keypad function code
Intercom/Speaker for the call button is "cb". For more information, refer to the Programming
wiring or Spandrel Manual, Form 5871, for Premier C..
wiring.
Wires to Dispenser Speaker
Blue = Speaker +
Violet = Speaker -
Wires to J30 on Dispenser Mother Board (Intercom Call Button)
Brown = Common
Red = Normally Closed Switch Position
Orange = Normally Open Switch Position

Spandrel Lighting Wiring (Premier C)


! WARNING The spandrel lighting wires will be joined together with the AC field wires in
Hazard of electrical the dispenser connection box. Connect the spandrel lighting earth ground
shock. More than one wire to the ground screw in the connection box. A ground screw is located on
disconnect switch either side of the terminal strip in the connection box.
may be required to
de-energize the device. Wires to Spandrel Lighting
Open the circuit before Black = ACH
removing cover. Keep White = ACC
cover secured when
Green = Earth Ground
power is applied.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-6 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

Model 67
Console/POS Interface Box
TTC TTD

Battery Display Display


Battery Signals Signals
Monitor

Display
Signals Operator Interface &

Electronics Block Diagram (Premier C)


Battery Test Product Selection
Keypads

Premier C series dispenser.


package. Use this block diagram as a reference when troubleshooting the
This block diagram illustrates the signal flow through the UDCB electronics
Interface
Expanded Board Manager and
Computer Arming Keys Display
Board Display
Signals Board
Pulsers

Handles
Watchdog
and Reset

Both Keypads’ Matrix


Signals and Manager/
Arming Key Signals
Handles
Pulsers

LED Board

Multiplex
Board
Valves

Full Flow Valve


Tokheim Corporation

Slow Flow Valve


Relay
Pulsers Intrinsically Pulsers Board Motor Control Line (RC)

Wiring Diagrams
Safe
Barrier Motor Relay Control or
Handles Assembly Handles
Suction Pump Motor (Suction)
4-7
4-8
Tokheim Corporation

Wiring Diagrams
Model 67
Console/POS Interface Box
TTC TTD

Battery Display Display


Battery Signals Signals
Monitor

Display
Signals Operator Interface &

Electronics Block Diagram (Premier B)


Battery Test Product Selection
Interface Keypads

Premier B series dispenser.


package. Use this block diagram as a reference when troubleshooting the
This block diagram illustrates the signal flow through the UDCB electronics
Expanded Board Manager and
Computer Arming Keys Display
Board Display
Signals Board
Pulsers

Handles
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

Watchdog
and Reset

Both Keypads’ Matrix


Signals and Manager/
Arming Key Signals
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00

Handles
Pulsers

LED Board

Multiplex
Board
Valves

Full Flow Valve

Slow Flow Valve


Relay
Motor Control Line (RC)
Pulsers Pulsers Board
Motor Relay Control or
Barrier Conduit
Handles Assembly Handles
Suction Pump Motor Relay
Junction Box (Suction)
Wiring Diagrams
H413B-R (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-9
Wiring Diagrams
H426B-R (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-10 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Wiring Diagrams
H311B-R, H322B-R & H324B-R (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-11
Wiring Diagrams
H428B-R (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-12 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
H413B-REB (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-13
Wiring Diagrams
H426B-REB (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-14 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
H322B-B3/B5 (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-15
Wiring Diagrams
AC Distribution Block Diagram (Premier B)

30" AC DISTRIBUTION WIRING SCHEMATIC

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-16 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

Mother Board (Premier B)

TO HANDLE SWITCHES AND


PULSERS: SEE PAGES 4-18 & 4-19
1A & 1B

2A & 2B

3A & 3B

WIRE HARNESS ASSY 421014

VALVES
SHOWN ON
PAGES 4-20
& 4-21
Tokheim Corporation

Wiring Diagrams
4-17
Wiring Diagrams
Pump Handles and Pulsers - H428B-S (Premier B)

To Mother Board J12


To Mother Board J11
To Mother Board J3

To Mother Board J4

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-18 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
Pump Handles and Pulsers (Premier B)

Mother Board J4
See page 4-16
See page 4-16
Mother Board J11
To Mother Board J3
See page 4-16

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-19
Wiring Diagrams
Motors and Valves - H428B-S (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-20 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
Motors and Valves (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-21
Wiring Diagrams
Displays (Premier B)

See page 4-17

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-22 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

AC Distribution (Premier B)

To Options Power Supply J5 See page 4-23


Tokheim Corporation

To DPT A J4 To DPT B J4
See page 4-24 See page 4-24

Wiring Diagrams
4-23

To Connection Box
See page 4-23
4-24
Tokheim Corporation

Wiring Diagrams
Options Power Supply (Premier B)

To DPT B J5
See page 4-24

To DPT A J5 To DPT B J6
See page 4-24 See page 4-24

To DPT A J6
See page 4-24
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

To DPT A J7
See page 4-25
To side B
Cash Acceptor
See page 4-24
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999

AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD

To AC Distribution Bd. J8
See page 4-22

To DPT Bd. J4 side A


See page 4-24 To DPT Bd. J4 side B
See page 4-24

CONNECTION BOX
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

Dispenser Payment Terminal (Premier B)

To Mother Bd. J16 To Mother Bd. J17


See pages 4-16 See pages 4-16

To Options P.S. J3 To Options P.S. J3


See page 4-23 See page 4-23
Tokheim Corporation

Wiring Diagrams
To Connection Box
4-25

See page 4-23


Wiring Diagrams
H324B INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-26 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
H426B INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-27
Wiring Diagrams
H426-REB INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-28 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
H428B-R INSIGHT Dispenser Payment Terminal (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-29
Wiring Diagrams
MaxVac System Wiring Diagram for Non-Blend Dispensers (Premier B)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-30 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
MaxVac System Wiring Diagram for Blending Dispensers (Premier B)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-31
4-32
Tokheim Corporation

Wiring Diagrams
System Wiring Diagram (Premier C)

FOR DISPLAYS CONNECTION FOR HANDLES/PULSERS CONNECTIONS


SEE PAGE 4-36 SEE PAGE 4-33, 4-34, & 4-35

FOR AC DISTRIBUTION
CONNECTIONS SEE PAGE 4-37
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual

FOR DPT
CONNECTIONS
SEE PAGE 4-39,
4-40, & 4-41
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999

SEE PAGE 4-37 SEE PAGE 4-39


FOR FOR
CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS
Wiring Diagrams
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (Premier C - H300 Series)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-33
Wiring Diagrams
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (Premier C - H400 Series)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-34 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Wiring Diagrams
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board (Premier C - H400 Series)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 4-35
Wiring Diagrams
Displays (Premier C )

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-36 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
AC Distribution (Premier C )

CONNECTION BOX
SEE PAGE 4-32
SEE PAGE 4-38
FOR MAXVAC

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-37
Wiring Diagrams

MaxVac Vapor Recovery (Premier C )

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-38 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
Standard DPT (Premier C )

CONNECTION BOX
SEE PAGE 4-21

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-39
Wiring Diagrams
Debit DPT (Premier C )

CONNECTION BOX
SEE PAGE 4-32

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-40 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Wiring Diagrams
INSIGHT DPT (Premier C )

SEE PAGE 4-32


CONNECTION
BOX

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 4-41
Wiring Diagrams

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


4-42 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Diagnostics

Section 5: Diagnostic Information

Scope
This section defines the diagnostic modes available for testing and
troubleshooting the Premier B and C series dispenser.

Section 5 Contents
Using the Manager Key and Arming Key ....................................... 5-2
Basic Programming ....................................................................... 5-3
Example of Basic Programming .................................................... 5-4
Premier B and C Diagnostic Modes
Mode F11 – View Communications Diagnostics ...................... 5-6
Mode F96 – View Error, State, & Termination Code Histories . 5-7
Mode F97 – Check Operator Keypads &
Nozzle Boot Switches ......................................... 5-10
Mode F98 – Initiate Display, DPT, & Product Selection
Keypad Diagnostics ............................................ 5-12
Mode F99 – View Software Date Code, CRC Code, and
ROM CRC Diagnostic Test ................................. 5-13
Calibrating Dispenser Meters ...................................................... 5-14
Testing Premier Dispenser to Console Communications ............. 5-14

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 5-1
Diagnostics
Using the Manager Key and Arming Key

Using the Manager Key


The manager's key is black. It is used to enter and exit manager modes. It can
only be used on side A of the dispenser.
Entering Manager Modes
Place the manager key in the upper left corner of the keyswitch area until a
function number begins blinking on the left side of the money display.
Remove the manager key quickly when the blinking starts. One beep
indicates that manager modes have been entered.
Exiting Manager Modes
Hold the manager key to the keyswitch area to exit the manager modes. The
displays will show the last sale data when the dispenser returns to run mode.

PREMIER B
“
KEYSWITCH
•
AREA F02

A MANAGER MODE
(FUNCTION NUMBER)
WILL APPEAR HERE
AND BEGIN TO BLINK

PREMIER C

“ KEYSWITCH
F02 • AREA

Using the Arming Key


The arming key is red. It is used to arm or disarm the dispenser. The arming
key can be used on both sides of a dispenser.
A fuel sale cannot When the arming key is held on the keyswitch area one tone indicates that
take place on a the dispenser is armed (ready to dispense fuel). Two tones indicate that the
disarmed dispenser dispenser has been disarmed.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-2 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Diagnostics
Basic Programming
All programming is accomplished with the manager key & the programming
buttons on the operator keypads.

Entering Programming / Manager Modes


1. Make certain that all of the nozzles are properly placed into their boots.
2. Place the manager key on the keyswitch area.
3. Hold it there until a mode number begins to blink and you hear a beep.
If this is not a first time start up, one of the following will appear in the
money/volume displays when entering the manager modes:
F01
If there are no problems, F01 will appear requesting level one security
code entry

1’s
If there is a low or disconnected battery, 1’s will appear. Tap a
programming button to continue. Call an ASR

F23
If there is a problem, F23 will appear. If ERR05 or PASS appear on start
up, the battery test will not be done and you will go directly to F23.
Check the dispenser programming. You may need to reprogram your
dispenser.

Moving from One Mode to the Next


With the mode number blinking, press and hold a programming button.
When the desired mode number appears, release the button. If the mode
number is not blinking, quickly tap any programming button until it begins to
blink. If you go past the mode desired, you can backup by pressing a backup
button.

Changing Parameter Information


Tap any programming button until the desired parameter begins to blink.
Press and hold down any programming button until the desired results
appear.
Backup buttons are
used to change mode If you go past the parameter you wanted to change, continue to tap the
numbers only. programming button until it wraps around to the desired parameter.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 5-3
Diagnostics
Example of Basic Programming

Programming Manager’s Mode F02


 Place the manager key on the keyswitch area.
‚ Hold the manager key onto the keyswitch area until the mode
Premier B displays number begins to blink in the money/volume display and you hear a
and keypad (not beep.
shown) operate the ƒ Depress and hold any programming button to increment the mode
same as the Premier C
number. Release the programming button upon reaching manager mode
displays and keypad
shown in the F02. Use the backup button(s) to select previous mode numbers. Backup
illustration below. buttons are shown with a “O” in the illustration below.
„ For TDS Plus only, use the product selection keypad (1 x 5) for
manager mode programming.
… The bottom number shown in the money/volume display is a counter for
non-zero sales and is a view only parameter. It cannot be selected.
† Tap any programming button once to select the next parameter.
‡ The next parameter selected (blinking) is in the Price Per Unit Volume
display (PPUV). This number shown here indicates the mode setting
speed. Depress and hold any programming button (except a backup
button) to increment this number. Release the button when the value you
want is reached. A valid entry for the mode setting speed is 0 – 9. The
default value for this setting is 5.

‚ …

“ 
‡ F02 •
A blinking display indicates
0234
that it is selected.
„ 5

†
ƒ

Backup buttons (“O”) are 4 X 20 DISPLAY


used to change manager mode
numbers only. The second
button down on the left side of
the operator interface keypad
or any CREDIT button (default
or programmed) is a backup
button. PREMIER C STANDARD DPT DISPLAY

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-4 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Diagnostics
Example of Basic Programming (continued)

Saving Manager Mode Settings


Manager mode settings are saved when:
• Advancing from one mode to the next
• Exiting manager’s modes

Exiting Manager Mode


Hold the manager key to the keyswitch area to exit manager mode. The
displays will show the last sale data when the dispenser returns to run mode.
Manager mode settings are saved.

PREMIER B
“
KEYSWITCH
•
AREA F02

PREMIER C

“ KEYSWITCH
F02 • AREA

An illustration of Alternate Exit Procedure


the dispenser Press the control button on the dispenser interface board (cardcage) for two
interface board is seconds. The displays will show the last sale data when the dispenser returns
located in section to run mode. Manager mode settings are saved.
3 of this manual.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 5-5
Diagnostics
Mode F11 – View Communications Diagnostics and
Watchdog Reset Counter
Using this Mode
Mode F11 displays:
• a diagnostic percentage of communication that the dispenser
has received from the console
• a diagnostic counter for the number of watchdog resets since
the dispenser became active
• a diagnostic number which indicates the status of dispenser
to DPT communication for side A and side B.

‚ ƒ

„ F11 11
100 00
Premier B displays (not
shown) provide the same
information as shown in
this Premier C illustration.
…

 Mode number F11


‚ Side A to DPT communication number, left digit, 1 = pass, 0 = fail
ƒ Side B to DPT communication number, right digit, 1 = pass, 0 = fail
• 00 = side A failed and side B failed
• 01 = side A failed and side B passed
• 10 = side A passed and side B failed
• 11 = side A passed and side B passed
„ Console to Dispenser Communication percentage - Any communication
percentage other than 000 or 100 indicates an intermittent
communication condition as shown below. The communication
percentage range is 000 to 100.
• 100 indicates normal operation when connected to a console.
• 100 is also displayed if the dispenser is connected to a
controller and F19 is set to stand-alone mode.
• 000 indicates that the dispenser communication link is not
established.
… Watchdog reset counter - Mode F11 watchdog reset count is reset each
time the dispenser is turned on. Normal operation equals 00. Anything
other than 00 indicates possible dispenser processing errors.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-6 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Diagnostics
Mode F96 – View Dispenser Error, State and
Termination Code Histories
Mode 96 is used to view the dispenser error history, state history, and
termination code history.
Using this Mode
• To alternate between history types, tap a programming
button while the E, S, or c is blinking.
• To change the history number, tap a programming button
while the history number is blinking.
• To clear all the diagnostic codes, tap a programming button
until the diagnostic code is blinking. Press and hold any
programming button until 2 beeps are sounded. This clears
the memory stack and allows new data to be recorded.
Quick Entry Method: Opening Manager Mode in Mode F96
Press and hold programming button 1 or 13 (Cash [cA] and Credit [cr] on the
Default Keypad Layout), or the top right softkey on the INSIGHT™ DPT
keypad while entering the manager modes. Manager Mode will start with
Mode F96. This quick entry method allows access to modes F96 through F99
(diagnostic modes) without entering a level 1 or level 2 security code.

 ‚
Premier B displays (not ƒ F96 01 …
shown) provide the same
information as shown in
X01 00
this Premier C illustration. „

 Mode number F96


‚ Dispenser address range: 01 – 16
If there is a problem
ƒ History type
and you need to call • E = Error histories: shows the last 16 dispenser
the Tokheim Solution errors that have occurred.
Center, be prepared to • S = State histories: shows the last 64 dispenser states
provide the history’s that have occurred.
diagnostic code. After • c = Termination code histories: shows the last 64
selecting the dispenser sale termination codes that have occurred.
appropriate History „ History number (Default = 00)
type (E,S, or c), and
• Error range: 00 – 15
History number, the
diagnostic code will • State range: 00 – 63.
appear. • Termination code range: 00 – 63
… Diagnostic Code (Default = 00)
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 5-7
Diagnostics
Mode F96 – View Dispenser Error, State and
Termination Code Histories (continued)
Error history is a record stored in memory of dispenser errors as they occur.
The most recent error added to the record is always history number 00.
Definitions of error Previously stored errors have their history number incremented by one for
codes can be found
each new error added to the record. See error history example below.
in Section 6.
State history is a record stored in memory of dispenser state conditions as
they occur. Each state the dispenser goes through (idle, dispensing, halted,
etc.) is recorded by a code number. See the chart on the next page. The state
codes are viewed by selecting the history number desired. The most recent
state code added to the record is always history number 00. The state code
which was added to the record before 00 is 01, and so on, up to 63 previous
entries. See state history example below.
Termination Code is a record stored in memory of sale terminations at the
dispenser. These codes are recorded the same way as state history codes.

Error History Example


History History History
Number Number Number
Code Error Code Code Error Code Code Error Code
00 31 00 32 00 09
01 33 01 32
The first error code is added 02 31 02 33
to the error history record. It 03 31
is given history number 00. As Two more errors are added to the As more errors are added to the
more error codes are added to error history record. The most error history record, the history
this record, this history recent code onto the stack (32, numbers continue to increment
number will increment to a in this example) is now history (with the oldest code having the
maximum of 15. number 00. largest history number).

HISTORY
SEQUENCE w   x   y
State History Example
History History History
Number Number Number
Code State Code Code State Code Code State Code
00 01 00 05 00 06
01 02 01 05
The first state code is added
02 01 02 02
to the state history record. It 03 01
is given history number 00. Two more errors are added to the As more state codes are added to
As more state codes are added state history record. The most the state history record, the
to this record, this history recent code onto the stack (05, history numbers continue to
number will increment up to a in this example) is now history increment (the oldest has the
maximum of 63. number 00. largest history number).

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-8 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Diagnostics
Mode F96 – View Dispenser Error, State and
Termination Code Histories (continued)

State codes (S) defined

State State
Brief Description Brief Description
Code Code
00 Status = 2F, Dispenser is not initialized 05 Segment Check

01 Dispenser is idle, handle is down 06 Dispenser is running, sale in progress

02 Dispenser is idle, handle is up 07 Sale is halted

03 Status = A0, handle is up, waiting cash approval 08 Stopped sale, restartable (soft halt)

04 Status = A1, handle is up, waiting credit approval 09 Terminated sale (hard halt)

Diagnostic Termination codes (c) defined

(c) Brief Description (c) Brief Description


Code Code
01 Normal sale termination 13 Controller sale termination

02 No pulse timeout 14 DPT sale termination

03 Controller blend ratio mismatch 15 Pulser disconnect

04 Undefined 16 Reverse pulser motion

05 Blender pulser overflow 17 Back and forth pulser motion

06 Blender error 18 Interference or phase 0 shorted to


phase 90
07 Blender pulser disconnect
19 Reverse pulser motion
08 Power loss
20 High flow rate
09 Stop button pressed
21 High flow rate
10 Cannot read phase 0 buffer
22 Undefined
11 Cannot read phase 90 buffer
23 999.989 maximum delivery exceeded
12 Phase 0 to phase 90 > max

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 5-9
Diagnostics
Mode F97 – Check Operator Keypads and Nozzle Boot
Switches
Mode F97 is used to check the keypad buttons of the operator interface and
product selection keypads for proper operation. It is also used to check the
nozzle boot switches. This mode can be entered by the standard method
using the security code entry or the quick entry method that does not require
security codes to access – see Mode F96 in this section.
Using this Mode
• To test the nozzle boot switches, remove any hose nozzle
(one at a time). “HHHH” will appear in the PPUV display
assigned to that nozzle. Single hose dispensers will show
“HHHH” in the PPUV display for product 1.
• To test the keypads, press any keypad button. The
preassigned number appears at the right side of the money
display.

 ‚
F97 27 ƒ

Premier B displays (not


P2
shown) provide the same
„
information as shown in
this Premier C illustration. HHHH

 Mode number F97


‚ Keypad numbers – as keypad buttons are pressed, the preassigned
keypad button number appears on the right side of the money display.
See the keypad diagram illustrations on the next page. Side A keypad
button numbers are displayed on side A when side A keypad buttons are
pressed. Side B keypad button numbers are displayed on side B when
side B keypad buttons are pressed.
ƒ Keypad function code – as keypad buttons are pressed, the keypad
function code is displayed on the right side of the volume display. The
keypad function code table on the next page defines the keypad function
codes (key codes) that will appear. A blank display indicates an
undefined keypad button.
„ The hose nozzle (handle) indicator is displayed on the dispenser side in
which the nozzle is removed from the boot. “HHHH” will appear in the
cash display of the same product as the hose nozzle that is removed.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-10 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Diagnostics
Mode F97 – Check Operator Keypads and Nozzle Boot
Switches (continued)

KEYPAD FUNCTION CODES PRODUCT SELECTION KEYPAD KEY NUMBERS


Keycode Displayed Press Keypad Button

0-9 0-9

cA Cash/Start
25 26 27 28 29
cr Credit

P1 Product 1

P2 Product 2

P3 Product 3

P4 Product 4 OPERATOR INTERFACE KEYPAD NUMBERS


(KEYPAD NUMBERS 7 & 19 ARE NOT USED)
P5 Product 5

SP Stop
6 5 4 3 2
cP Currency Present 1
uP Units Present 12 11 10 9 8
cL Clear
18 17 16 15 14
cb Call / Help 13
Alternate Push-to-Start
(only programmed if site
24 23 22 21 20
Sb
controller supports this
feature)

INSIGHT DPT SOFTKEYS KEY NUMBERS

49 54
50 55
51 56
52 57
53 58

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 5-11
Diagnostics
Mode F98 – Initiate Display, DPT, and Product Selection
Keypad Diagnostics
This mode is used to check the money/volume and PPUV displays for proper
operation. This mode also initiates diagnostic mode for DPTs if present (see
sections 7 & 8 for DPT diagnostics).
Using this Mode
• Tap any programming button to begin the diagnostics. The
Money/Volume and PPUV display in sequence 0’s through
9’s for all digits until the mode is exited. Arrows and
decimals appear with every odd digit displayed.
• Press any button on the Product Selection Keypad to test the
keypad buttons. A tone is heard when a button is pressed.
• To exit this mode and proceed to mode F99, hold the
manager's key to the keyswitch area.


F98

‚
000000
000000

Premier B displays (not


shown) provide the same 0000 0000 0000
information as shown in
this Premier C illustration. 0000 0000 0000
ƒ

 Mode number F98


‚ Money/Volume and PPUV displays – All digits in these displays
increment from 0 thru 9.
ƒ Product Selection Keypad – A tone is heard when a Product Selection
Keypad button is pressed.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-12 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Diagnostics
Mode F99 – View Software Date Code, CRC Code and
ROM CRC Diagnostic Test
This mode is used to view the dispenser software date code and the results of
the cyclical redundancy check (CRC). The date code and CRC code helps to
identify a dispenser type along with its model number. The CRC test verifies
the CPU board program memory is valid.
Using this Mode
• Tap any programming button to begin the diagnostics. The P
(Pass) or F (Fail) in the money display indicates whether the
CPU board passed or failed the CRC test. When the
computed CRC and stored CRC codes do not match, the
CRC code test has failed.
• The software date code is the release date of the software
installed. It appears in the Volume display and is shown in
mm/dd/yy format.
• To exit this mode and proceed to mode F99, hold the
manager's key to the keyswitch area.

 ‚
F99 P ƒ
020394
Premier B displays (not
shown) provide the same „
information as shown in F02A F02A
this Premier C illustration.
…

 Mode number F99


‚ The P(Pass) or F(Fail) in the money display indicates whether the CPU
board program memory passed or failed the CRC test.
ƒ The software date code is the release date of the software installed. It is
shown in mm/dd/yy format.
„ Computed CRC code – A “view only” parameter that represents the
computed results of the CRC test.
… Stored CRC code – A “view only” parameter that represents the stored
value of the CPU board’s program memory CRC code.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 5-13
Diagnostics
Testing Dispenser Meters for Calibration

1. Enter manager mode F17 to set the maximum delivery amount allowed
Meter Calibration: by the dispenser.
Refer to the Meter 2. Set the maximum delivery to the amount desired for the calibration test.
Calibration 3. Enter manager mode F18 to set the slow flow offset for the dispenser.
Procedure in the 4. Set and/or verify the slow flow offset desired.
Tokheim Hydraulic 5. Return to the run mode.
System Home Study 6. Begin a sale with the dispenser.
Course Student 7. Check the measured value against the value set in manager mode F17.
Workbook and
8. Compare the results against your state and local regulations and calibrate
Video.
the meter if required. Refer to the meter calibration procedure in the
Make sure the meter
has gone through Tokheim Hydraulic System Home Study course video.
it’s break-in period. 9. After the completion of the test, reset the maximum delivery and the
slow flow offset values to the desired values for normal operation.

Testing Premier Dispenser to Console Communications

TTD and TTC are acronyms for Talk To Dispenser and Talk To Console
signals respectively. The next page describes the locations where TTD and
TTC communications can be tested. Use a reliable multimeter to take
measurements.
When measuring DC Volts, connect the black (-) probe to DCC nearest to the
point where the voltage reading is taken.
The green connector referred to in the table on the next page refers to the
TTD/TTC/DCC green connector in the 67 box. Some connectors on the 67
box interface (I/F) boards have the communication signals labeled on the end
of the connector where the wires are inserted. The labels are not visible
unless the connector is unplugged. See connector illustration below for
signal locations.

67 BOX INTERFACE BOARD

DCC
TTC
TTD
GREEN
CONNECTOR

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-14 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Diagnostics
Testing Premier Dispenser to Console Communications
(continued)
FIELD 67 BOX
DISPENSER WIRING
WIRING GREEN CONNECTOR
(SEE ILLUSTRATION
IN-LINE ON THE OPPOSITE
TP2 J19 CONNECTOR J-BOX PAGE FOR SIGNAL
LOCATIONS)
13 1 8 2 TTD
DISPENSER
INTERFACE 1 2 9 3 DCC
BOARD 12 3 TTC
7 1
5 +12 VDC

• TP2 (Test Point 2) is located on the Interface Board. See


pages 3-6 and 3-7.
• J19 is located on the Mother Board. See sections 3 and 4 for
Mother board diagrams.
• The In-line Connector is the connector that joins wire
harness 319588 to 319589 (Premier B). See page 4-17.
• The J-Box is the junction box in the hydraulics cabinet of
the dispenser. See section 2 for junction box drawings.
• The 67 box is usually located in the back office at the site.

TTD Circuit TTC Circuit


Green LED on the Yellow LED on the
Instructions Interface Board Interface Board
(LED 2) (LED 1)
Set the multimeter to measure DC Volts. approx. 2.25 VDC approx. .20 - .44 VDC
With everything connected together and
power on, measure voltage. LED blinking LED blinking

Disconnect the green plug in the 67 Box, approx. 12 VDC approx. .05 VDC
measure voltage on the wires going to the
dispenser. LED on LED on

Reconnect the green plug in the 67 Box. approx. .75 VDC approx. .10 VDC
Disconnect the console and attach the
dummy plug to the 67 Box. Measure at the LED off LED on
green plug in the 67 Box.
Test TTD - Disconnect the green plug in
the 67 box and check the TTD LED. LED on
Short TTD to DCC on the green plug.
Check the LED. Reconnect the green plug LED off
in the 67 box when done.
Disconnect J19 from the dispenser Mother
board, check LED. LED on
Short pin 1 to pin 2, check LED. LED off
Test TTC - Set the multimeter to measure
resistance (ohms). Put the black probe on Multimeter should show
pin 2 of J19, and put the red probe on pin approx. 1500 - 2000 ohms
3 of J19.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 5-15
Diagnostics

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


5-16 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Troubleshooting Tips

Section 6: Error Message Handling &


Troubleshooting Tips

Scope
This section includes information to assist in diagnosing error messages and
troubleshooting Premier B and C series dispensers. If the problems
encountered cannot be corrected using the information in this section, please
call the Tokheim Solution Center at 800-866-6762.
Service parts can be ordered by calling (219) 470-4710.

Error codes appear in the volume display of the dispenser when a problem
is detected. Refer to the following pages for descriptions of the errors and
corrective actions.
All errors except 04, 41, 42, 43, and 44 are reset by removing and replacing
a nozzle or by entering and exiting manager modes.

Section 6 Contents (for Premier B & C series dispensers)


Logic Sequence to Dispenser Repair ............................................ 6-2
Circuit Board Signal Flow Block Diagram (Premier B) .................. 6-2
Circuit Board Signal Flow Block Diagram (Premier C) .................. 6-3
ERR 01 – ERR 09 ......................................................................... 6-4
ERR 3x – ERR 13 .......................................................................... 6-5
ERR 14 – ERR 21 ......................................................................... 6-6
ERR 22 – ERR 27 ......................................................................... 6-7
ERR 39 & ERR 49 ......................................................................... 6-8

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 6-1
Troubleshooting Tips
Logic Sequence to Dispenser Repair (Premier B & C)

1. Is the electronics enclosure fan running?


• If the fan is running, AC power is present in the dispenser.
• If the fan is not running, find the reason for an open AC
circuit to the dispenser electronics.

2. Determine if the dispenser programming is correct.


Check the following modes:
Mode 11 Communication Diagnostics
Mode 19 Dispenser Function Code
Mode 23 Set Dispenser Parameters
Mode 98 Display, DPT, and Product Selection Keypad
Diagnostics
Mode 99 Software Diagnostics

3. Check test points on circuit boards.


Check the test points on the circuit boards to determine if the proper voltages
are present. See Section 3 – System Boards for locations of test points.

Circuit Board Signal Flow Block Diagram (Premier B)


Model 67
Console/POS Interface Box
TTC TTD

Battery Display Display


Battery Signals Signals
Monitor

Display
Signals Operator Interface &
Battery Test Product Selection
Interface Keypads
Expanded Board Manager and
Computer Arming Keys Display
Board Display
Signals Board
Pulsers

Handles
Watchdog
and Reset

Both Keypads’ Matrix


Signals and Manager/
Arming Key Signals
Handles
Pulsers

LED Board

Multiplex
Board
Valves

Full Flow Valve

Slow Flow Valve


Relay
Pulsers Pulsers Board Suction System
Product Relay
Motor Relay Control to Suction
Barrier Conduit
Handles Assembly Handles Motor

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


6-2 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Troubleshooting Tips
Circuit Board Signal Flow Block Diagram (Premier C)

Model 67
Console/POS Interface Box
TTC TTD

Battery Display Display


Battery Signals Signals
Monitor

Display
Signals Operator Interface &
Battery Test Product Selection
Interface Keypads
Expanded Board Manager and
Computer Arming Keys Display
Board Display
Signals Board
Pulsers

Handles
Watchdog
and Reset

Both Keypads’ Matrix


Signals and Manager/
Arming Key Signals
Handles
Pulsers

LED Board

Multiplex
Board
Valves

Full Flow Valve

Slow Flow Valve


Relay
Pulsers Intrinsically
Safe
Pulsers Board Suction System
Product Relay
Barrier Motor Relay Control to Suction
Handles Assembly Handles Motor

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 6-3
Troubleshooting Tips
Dispenser Error Codes (Premier B & C)
An error code is displayed in the volume display when the dispenser detects
a problem. If your dispenser is equipped with the MaxVac Vapor Recovery
System, refer to Section 8 if error codes 23, 24, or 31 thru 34 are displayed
by your dispenser AND an error LED is on. The LEDs are located either on
the Multiplex board (non-blend dispensers) or on the Blend Control board
(blender dispensers).

DESCRIPTION OF
ERROR CODE CORRECTIVE ACTION
ERROR
The security code entered The correct code must be entered
in mode F13 is invalid. to gain access to level 2 modes.
ERR 02
The security code entered The correct security code must be
in Mode E01 is invalid. entered to access level 3 modes.
For blenders only: Make certain that a zero is not
The number of bad sales programmed in mode F21. To clear
ERR 04 has reached the bad sale this error, the dispenser must be
limit as programmed in powered down and restarted.
manager's mode F21.
A memory (RAM) test failed When this error occurs, check all
on power up. programmed variables. Use the
The dispenser may have manager key to enter the manager
ERR 05
been powered down modes and correct any values that
improperly (having a might have changed.
disconnected battery etc.).
When a low battery (still This error can be disabled by
capable of retaining entering and exiting manager
memory) is detected, this modes. However, if the battery is
ERR 08 error appears one minute still low, this error will reappear 1
after power up or after four minute after the next power up.
consecutive battery tests,
performed hourly.
When a critically low battery This error can be disabled by
(one that may not store entering and exiting the manager
sales data) is detected, this modes while the error is displayed.
error appears one minute However, if the battery is still
ERR 09 after power up or after four critically low, this error will reappear
consecutive battery tests, 1 minute after the next power up.
performed hourly. This error should be serviced
immediately because sales data
could be lost.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


6-4 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Troubleshooting Tips
Dispenser Error Codes (continued)
ERR 11 – Err 26 appear on Blender dispensers only.

DESCRIPTION OF
ERROR CODE CORRECTIVE ACTION
ERROR

Dispensers equipped with the MaxVac Vapor Recovery System:


If error codes 31 thru 34 are displayed AND a Multiplex Board LED is on,
make sure that the power supply for the MaxVac option is on.

The number of
ERR 3x dispenser errors for
Make certain that a zero is not
(Err 31, 32, 33, & 34) hose (x) has reached programmed in mode F21. This mode
the dispenser error
indicates a potential problem with the
Note: Err 3x and 4x will limits as programmed
Interface board, multiplex board, a
appear on the side of in manager mode
the dispenser that has pulser, pulser barrier board, pulser
F21. The sale is
the problem. harness, or electrical interference.
terminated as a bad
sale.
The number of bad
sales for hose (x) has Make certain zero is not programmed
ERR 4x reached the bad sale in mode F21. To clear this error, the
(Err 41, 42, 43, & 44) limit as programmed dispenser must be powered down and
in manager mode restarted.
F21.
Product 1 used for
This error indicates dirty strainer
ERR 11 blending is
screens and filter.
dispensing too slowly.
Product 2 used for
This error indicates dirty strainer
ERR 12 blending is
screens and filter.
dispensing too slowly.
This error indicates a defective
Product 1 used for
submerged pump circuit, the impact
ERR 13 blending is not
valve under the dispenser, or a blend
dispensing.
controller board.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 6-5
Troubleshooting Tips
Dispenser Error Codes (continued)
ERR 11 – Err 26 appear on Blender dispensers only.

DESCRIPTION OF
ERROR CODE CORRECTIVE ACTION
ERROR
Indicates a defective submerged
Product 2 used for
pump circuit, the impact valve under
ERR 14 blending is not
the dispenser, or a blend controller
dispensing.
board.
Product 1 used for
blending is uncontrollable Indicates dirty strainer screens and
ERR 15
because of severe filters.
pressure fluctuations.
Product 2 used for
blending is uncontrollable Indicates dirty strainer screens and
ERR 16
because of severe filters. E
pressure fluctuations.

Product 2 is leaking into


Indicates a bad blender valve or a
ERR 18 product 1 when only
check valve.
product 1 is called for.

Product 1 is leaking into


An indication of a bad blender valve
ERR 19 product 2 when only
or a check valve.
product 2 is called for.

This error indicates a potential


problem with the Computer (CPU)
No communication with board, Blend Controller board,
ERR 20
blend co-processor. Blend Co-processor EPROM, or a
Mother board. Power down, then
power up the dispenser.
The number of dispenser
errors for product 1 has This error indicates a potential
reached the dispenser problem with the Blend Controller
ERR 21 error limit as board, Interface board, a pulser,
programmed in manager pulser barrier board, pulser
mode F21. The sale is harness, or electrical interference.
terminated as a bad sale.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


6-6 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Troubleshooting Tips
Dispenser Error Codes (continued)
ERR 11 – Err 26 appear on Blender dispensers only.

DESCRIPTION OF
ERROR CODE CORRECTIVE ACTION
ERROR
The number of dispenser
errors for product 2 has This error indicates a potential
reached the dispenser problem with the Blend Controller
ERR 22 error limit as board, Interface board, a pulser,
programmed in manager pulser barrier, pulser harness, or
mode F21. The sale is electrical interference.
terminated as a bad sale.
Dispensers equipped with the MaxVac Vapor Recovery System:
If error codes 23 or 24 are displayed AND a Blend Control Board LED is on, be
sure that the power supply is on for the MaxVac option.
This error indicates a disconnected
Product 1 pulser is or defective pulser, or a potential
ERR 23
disconnected. problem with the pulser harness or
pulser barrier.
This error indicates a disconnected
Product 2 pulser is or defective pulser, or a potential
ERR 24
disconnected. problem with the pulser harness or
pulser barrier.
The operator has
attempted to dispense A valid blend ratio must be
product from a blend programmed in mode F26 before
ERR 25
hose with the blend ratio fuel can be dispensed from the
set to the default value blend hose.
(non).
The blend ratio in the The blend ratio must be changed in
dispenser does not mode F26 or in the console before
ERR 26
match the blend ratio in fuel can be dispensed from the
the console for that hose. blend hose.
Upper limit on flow rate
has been reached. Error
ERR 27 Raise a handle to clear error.
occurs on extremely
excessive flow rates.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 6-7
Troubleshooting Tips
Dispenser Error Codes (continued)
ERR 39 & Err 49 only appear in dispensers with version QA
dispenser software.

DESCRIPTION OF
ERROR CODE CORRECTIVE ACTION
ERROR
Difficullty in authorizing
fuel sales from a hose
controller. This is a
Diagnostic Error Code
and can only be viewed
in mode F96.
ERR 39
The hose controller is Enter mode F96 and verify that an
sending an invalid Err39 has occured. Contact you
For Premier B /
maximum delivery ASR for an Engineering evaluation
Wayne Retroheads
amount (000.00) and the of the problem.
Only
dispenser is not
accepting the sale
authorization. An Err 39
is recorded only in the
error history in mode
F96.
Preset sales overshoot
or undershoot desired
amount. Calculations by
the site controller results
ERR 49
in maximum delivery Enter mode F96 and verify an Err
errors on some preset 49 has occured. Contact you ASR
For Premier B /
sales. This is an for an Engineering evaluation of the
Wayne Retroheads
indication of a flaw in the problem.
Only
site controller software.
An Err 49 is recorded
only in the error history in
mode F96.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


6-8 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Standard DPT

Section 7: PREMIER STANDARD DPT (Premier B & C)


Scope
This section contains technical information on the standard Dispenser Payment
Terminals (DPT) for Premier B & C series dispensers. It includes information on
diagnostic tests, troubleshooting, and communications settings for the following
For INSIGHT standard DPTs.
DPTs, see • Standard DPT (includes Gasboy DPT)
Section 8 • Standard DPT with TDS (Tokheim Debit System)
• Standard DPT with TDS Plus
General
The DPT allows a customer to perform cash or credit transactions at the
dispenser without entering the store or interacting with a cashier.
The Tokheim Debit System (TDS or TDS Plus) option allows the customer to
perform debit transactions at the dispenser.
The DPT is linked to a Site Controller via the Model 69 Interface Box using
RS-485 communication protocols. See the block diagrams of the standard DPT
types included in this section.
The following table provides the DPT controller board and software required for
the three types of standard DPTs:
IMPORTANT
Be aware that static Type of Dispenser DPT Controller DPT Controller Board
electricity can result Payment Terminal Board number Software version #
in circuit board
failure. Precautions to Standard DPT 420929-4 JP.02.18.00+
prevent static
420929-13 (Premier C) MT.QD.01.00+ (Premier C)
discharge should be Standard DPT with TDS
420929-10 (Premier B) MT.QD.02.00+ (Premier B)
taken prior to
touching a circuit Standard DPT with TDS Plus 421844-1 MT.03.01.00+
board.
Section 7 Contents
Component List for Standard DPT Assemblies (Premier B & C) .... 7-2
Subassembly Orientation (Premier B) .......................................... 7-2
Subassembly Orientation (Premier C) .......................................... 7-3
Standard DPT Information (Premier B & C) ................................... 7-4
Standard DPT with TDS Information (Premier B & C) .................... 7-9
Standard DPT with TDS Plus Information (Premier B & C) .......... 7-13
DPT Diagnostics (Premier B & C) ................................................ 7-18
Troubleshooting Standard DPT Problems (Premier B & C) .......... 7-21
Changing Paper on a Tear-Bar Printer (Premier B) ...................... 7-27
Changing Paper on a Standard Printer (Premier C) ..................... 7-29
Clearing a Paper Jam on a Standard Printer (Premier C) ............ 7-30
Cash Acceptor
Lock Assemblies (Premier B & C) ......................................... 7-32
Access to the Cash Acceptor Cassette (Premier B) .............. 7-33
Removing the Cash Acceptor (Premier B) ............................ 7-33
Access to the Cash Acceptor Cassette (Premier C) .............. 7-34
Removing the Cash Acceptor (Premier C) ............................ 7-34
Dip Switches on the Cash Acceptor (Premier B & C) ............ 7-35
Card Reader Cleaning Procedure (Premier B & C) .............. 7-36
Adjusting Contrast of 4 x 20 DPT Display (Premier B & C) .......... 7-36
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-1
Standard DPT
Component List for Standard DPT Assemblies
Includes Standard DPT with TDS & TDS Plus and Gasboy
DPT (Premier B & C)

A Standard DPT assembly consists of a Controller board and may contain any of
the peripheral devices listed below.
• Audio Transducer (beeper)
• Card Reader
• Cash Acceptor (Standard DPT and Standard DPT with TDS Plus only)
• Customer Display
• Printer
• Keypad
• Secure Pin Pad (Standard DPT with TDS Plus only)

Subassembly Orientation - Standard DPT Assemblies


Includes Standard DPT with TDS & with TDS Plus and
Gasboy DPT (Premier B)

Cash Acceptor
Cash Acceptor
Cassette

DPT Printer

DPT Controller
Board
Premier C
Dispenser Head

DPT Dial
Assembly

OR Non-DPT Panel
(used when no DPT is present) Premier B (45")

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-2 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Subassembly Orientation - Standard DPT Assemblies
Includes Standard DPT with TDS & with TDS Plus and
Gasboy DPT (Premier C)

Premier C (45")

Cash
Acceptor

DPT
Controller
Board

DPT Printer
(attached to back
Handle/Pulser of door)
Barrier Assembly

DPT
Controller
Boards

Premier C (30")
MaxVac
System
Boards
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-3
Standard DPT
DPT Block Diagram (Premier B & C)

PAPER
SENSOR PRINTER TO POS / SITE
PRINTER CONTROL CONTROLLER
BOARD
PAPER
CUTTER
DPT BOARD DPT BOARD
J2
420929-4 J4 69 INTERFACE BOX J4
420929-4
BUZZER
DISPENSER DISPENSER
J1 MOTHER BOARD
SIDE "A" SIDE "B"
J5 J16 J17 J5
ASSEMBLY
J8
J10

J7 To Circuit Breakers
J6
J9 J11 J12 Blender Power
sides A & B

240V
J3 J2 J1 J8
4 X 20 CASH CARD
DISPLAY ACCEPTOR READER OPTIONS
J7
POWER SUPPLY 120V
TRANSFORMER
J4 J5 J6

AC Power from
AC Distribution board J14

Connector and Test Point Locations

LED 1 LED 2

J1 J8 J7 J12 J2 J3

Test Point
Description
Number
Note: Jumpers JU1 & JU4 are
TP1 Main input power; 23.5 to 24.5 VDC soldered and are not meant to be
TP2 Paper cutter power; 23.5 to 24.5 VDC configured in the field
TP3 Printer power; 19.75 to 21.5 VDC
SW2
TP4 Unregulated logic power; 7.25 to 11 VDC
Battery voltage; DPT on = TP6 voltage LED 4, 5, 6, 7
TP5
DPT off = 3 to 3.4 VDC
TP6 Regulated logic power; 4.75 to 5.25 VDC
TP7 Display contrast adjust voltage; -4.75 to -5 VDC

TP8 Gnd; System DCC


LED 8
J9 LED 3 J10 J4 J5 J11 J6

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-4 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Jumper and Switch Locations (Premier B & C)
DPT Controller Board - 420929

SW2
Depressing SW2
initiates a hard reset to
the DPT controller
board processor and
SW1 causes the dipswitch
settings of SW1 to be
read.
U13

JU5 JU9 JU10 JU12 JU11

Jumper Settings
Reference the jumper illustrations on the left and the jumper locations on the
controller board shown above.
Factory settings: Highlighted areas in the table below

JUMPER DESCRIPTION PINS 1&2 PINS 2&3 OPEN


JU5 JU5 WATCHDOG* ENABLED -------------------- DISABLED

2 1
JU6 Normally open; when pins 1&2 are enabled, DPT enters diagnositcs.
JU7 Normally open; AC low power detect is not used.
JU6 JU7
2 3
JU8

1 2 2 1
JU8 BATTERY** DISABLED ENABLED --------------------
1

JU9*** SITE CONTROLLER


HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX --------------------
COMMUNICATIONS
JU9 JU10
1 2 3 1 2 3
JU10*** SITE CONTROLLER
HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX --------------------
COMMUNICATIONS
.
1
JU11

JU11*** SITE CONTROLLER


3 2

COMMUNICATIONS HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX --------------------


JU12

JU12 SITE CONTROLLER


2

COMMUNICATIONS -------------------- -------------------- HALF DUPLEX


1

*The watchdog is the power supervision of the CPU board and should be enabled
**The battery is the DPT, CPU board, RAM backup.
***These jumpers configure the CPU board for full or half duplex.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-5
Standard DPT
Switch Settings (Premier B & C)

SW1, Switch Positions 1 and 8


DPT Communication Rate Settings
RS-485 COMMUNICATION RATE SET BY SWITCH SW1
SWITCH POS 1 SWITCH POS 8
UDC COMM2 PORT SITE CNTRLR COMM1 PORT
COMM RATE (BPS) COMM RATE (BPS)
PREMIER Factory Settings:
ON 19,200 ON 4800 1 = ON
OFF not used OFF 9600 8 = OFF

GASBOY ONLY
SW1, Switch Positions 1 and 8 SW1, Switch Position 2
Printer and Display Settings DPT Dispenser Side
PRINTER AND DISPLAY TYPE SET BY SWITCH SW1 UDC COMM2 PORT

SWITCH POS. 2 ADDRESS


SWITCH POSITION 1 SWITCH POSITION 8
PRINTER TYPE DISPLAY TYPE
ON = (Side A) 1
ON TEAR BAR ON 4 LINE
OFF = (Side B) 2
CUTTER
OFF OFF 2 LINE Factory Settings:
BAR
Side A = ON
Side B = OFF
SW1, Switch Positions 3 thru 7
DPT Address settings Site Controller COMM 1 Port
IMPORTANT: Factory settings:
Depending on the site controller used, these DPT Address Side A = address 1
Settings and the Dispenser Address Settings MUST match. Side B = address 2

SWITCH POSITION SWITCH POSITION


ADDRESS ADDRESS
3 4 5 6 7 (1-16) 3 4 5 6 7 (17-32)

ON ON ON ON ON 1 ON ON ON ON OFF 17
OFF ON ON ON ON 2 OFF ON ON ON OFF 18
ON OFF ON ON ON 3 ON OFF ON ON OFF 19
OFF OFF ON ON ON 4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 20

ON ON OFF ON ON 5 ON ON OFF ON OFF 21


OFF ON OFF ON ON 6 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 22
ON OFF OFF ON ON 7 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 23
OFF OFF OFF ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 24
ON ON ON OFF ON 9 ON ON ON OFF OFF 25
OFF ON ON OFF ON 10 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 26
ON OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 27
OFF OFF ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 28
ON ON OFF OFF ON 13 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 29
OFF ON OFF OFF ON 14 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 30
ON OFF OFF OFF ON 15 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 31
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 32

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-6 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Controller Board Connectors (Premier B & C)

J1 Beeper Connector
1 - Regulated +12 VDC
2 - Beeper On/Off

J2 Printer Control/Data Connector


1 - Data write command signal 17 - No Connection
2 - Bit 0 data 18 - System DCC, low paper sensor
3 - Bit 1 data 19 - System DCC, printer power supply
4 - Bit 2 data 20 - System DCC, printer power supply
5 - Bit 3 data 21 - +20 VDC printer power supply
6 - Bit 4 data 22 - +20 VDC printer power supply
7 - Bit 5 data 23 - +24 VDC paper cutter power
8 - Bit 6 data 24 - Relay active signal (to start paper cutter)
9 - Bit 7 data 25 - Home position signal for paper cutter
10 - No Connection 26 - No Connection
11 - +5 VDC printer logic power 27 - Paper low sensor (active low)
12 - +5 VDC printer logic power 28 - Data busy (active low)
13 - No Connection 29 - Out of paper signal (active low)
14 - System DCC, printer logic power 30 - Data received by printer signal (active low)
15 - System DCC, printer logic power 31 - Printer error condition signal (active low)
16 - System DCC, paper cutter 32 - Reset printer signal (active low)

J3 LED Backlight Connector


1 - Unregulated +8 VDC
2 - System DCC

J4 Site Controller Port Connector


1 - System DCC
2 - System DCC
3 - +RS-485 (non-inverting) differential signal
4 - -RS-485 (inverting) differential signal

J5 UDC Port Connector


1 - System DCC
2 - System DCC
3 - +RS-485 (non-inverting) differential signal
4 - -RS-485 (inverting) differential signal

J6 Main Power Connector


1 - Regulated +24 VDC (23.5 to 24.5)
2 - Unregulated +8VDC (8 to 12.5)
3 - System DCC

J7 Cash Acceptor Connector


1 - Cash Acceptor DCC, opto isolated 3 - Cash Acceptor transmit, opto isolated
2 - Cash Acceptor +5VDC, opto isolated 4 - Cash Acceptor receive, opto isolated

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-7
Standard DPT
Controller Board Connectors Defined (continued)

J8 Display Board Connector


1 - +5 VDC power (4.75 to 5.25) 9 - Data signal bit 3
2 - System DCC 10 - Data signal bit 2
3 - Register select for display board 11 - Data signal bit 5
4 - Contrast control (-5 to +2.5 VDC) 12 - Data signal bit 4
5 - Upper 2 x 20 display decode signal 13 - Data signal bit 7
6 - Read/Write signal (R=1, W=0) 14 - Data signal bit 6
7 - Data signal bit 1 15 - Lower 2 x 20 display decode signal
8 - Data signal bit 0 16 - Display bezel ground, tied to DCC at standoff

J9 Card Reader Connector


1 - Active low signal shows card is fully inserted
2 - Track 2 card data
3 - Active low signal shows card is moving through unit
4 - Indicates valid Track 2 data
5 - No Connection
6 - +5 VDC (4.75 to 5.25) for card reader logic
7 - System DCC
8 - Indicates valid Track 1 data
9 - Track 1 card data

J10 Keypad Connector


1 - System DCC 10 - Keypad matrix, row 2
2 - System DCC 11 - Keypad matrix, row 3
3 - No Connection 12 - Keypad matrix, row 4
4 - No Connection 13 - Keypad matrix, row 5
5 - Keypad matrix, column 1 14 - Keypad matrix, row 6
6 - Keypad matrix, column 2 15 - Not used
7 - Keypad matrix, column 3 16 - Not used
8 - Keypad matrix, column 4 17 - Not used
9 - Keypad matrix, row 1 18 - Not used

J11 Site Controller Port Connector (Gasboy Interface)


1 - System DCC 4 - Differential receive, non-inverting (Rx+)
2 - System DCC 5 - Differential transmit, non-inverting (Tx+)
3 - Differential receive, inverting (Rx-) 6 - Differential transmit, inverting (Tx-)

J12 Cash Acceptor Switch Sensor Connector


1 - Active low signal, detects open security enclosure
2 - System DCC

Light Emitting Diodes (LED’s)


The LED will be on when the described signal is active
LED1 Red Serial data is being received by the DPT from the Cash Acceptor
LED2 Green Serial data is being transmitted by the DPT to the Cash Acceptor
LED3 Red Diagnostic test signal defined by software
LED4 Red Receive signal (RS-485) site controller port J4
LED5 Green Transmit signal (RS-485) site controller port J4
LED6 Red Receive signal (RS-485) UDC port J5
LED7 Green Transmit signal (RS-485) UDC port J5
LED8 Yellow +5VDC Logic power
Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
7-8 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Standard DPT with TDS (Premier B & C)

IMPORTANT NOTES: The standard DPT with TDS Controller board (part # 420929-10 for Premier B,
1. The TDS network and 420929-13 for Premier C) is the same board as the Standard DPT controller
will not function board (part # 420929-4) with the addition of a battery to retain customer injection
properly without a information in RAM memory while the dispenser is powered down.
TED unit installed.
2. The DPTs in the The standard DPT with TDS controller board supports Debit functions by
dispenser must have interfacing with a Model 170 TED (Tokheim Encryption Device) unit. The TED
software version unit is attached to the Model 69 interface box cover. The TED unit enables
MT.QD.01.00 for secure communication between DPTs and the POS or Site Controller located in
Premier C or the main building. The TED unit is installed in the RS-485 communication link
MT.QD.02.00 for between the POS or Site Controller and the model 69 interface box. See
Premier B installed. additional TED unit information on page 7-11.
3. Software version
MT.QD.01.00 or
higher does not
support cash
acceptors.

Standard DPT with TDS Block Diagram

PAPER
SENSOR TO POS / SITE
PRINTER
CONTROLLER
PRINTER CONTROL
BOARD
PAPER TED
CUTTER UNIT
DPT BOARD DPT BOARD
J2
420929-7 J4 69 INTERFACE BOX J4
420929-7
TO DISPLAY BOARD DISPENSER DISPENSER
CONNECTOR J9 J1 MOTHER BOARD
DISPENSER SIDE "A"
SIDE "A" SIDE "B"
J5 J16 J17 J5
ASSEMBLY
J8
J10

J7 To Circuit Breakers
J6
J9 J11 J12 Blender Power
sides A & B

240V
J3 J2 J1 J8
4 X 20 CARD
DISPLAY READER OPTIONS
J7
POWER SUPPLY 120V
TRANSFORMER
J4 J5 J6

AC Power from
AC Distribution board J14

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-9
Standard DPT
Jumper and Switch Locations for Standard DPT with
TDS Controller Board (420929)

The SW1 switch


settings and
controller board
connector information
on the standard DPT
with TDS controller SW1
board are the same as
the standard DPT
controller board. U13
See pages 7-5, 7-6,
and 7-7.

JU5 JU9 JU10 JU12 JU11


SW2
Depressing SW2 initiates a hard reset to
the DPT controller board processor and
causes the dipswitch settings of SW1 to
be read.

Jumper Settings (Standard DPT with TDS)


Reference the jumper illustrations on the left and the jumper locations on the
controller board shown above.
Factory settings: Highlighted areas in the table below

JUMPER DESCRIPTION PINS 1&2 PINS 2&3 OPEN


JU5 JU5 WATCHDOG* ENABLED -------------------- DISABLED

2 1
JU6 Normally open; when pins 1&2 are enabled, DPT enters diagnositcs.
JU7 Normally open; AC low power detect is not used.
JU6 JU7
3
JU8

JU8 BATTERY** DISABLED ENABLED --------------------


2

1 2 2 1
1

JU9*** SITE CONTROLLER


HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX --------------------
COMMUNICATIONS
JU9 JU10
1 2 3 1 2 3
JU10*** SITE CONTROLLER
HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX --------------------
COMMUNICATIONS
.
1
JU11

JU11*** SITE CONTROLLER


2

COMMUNICATIONS HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX --------------------


3
JU12

JU12 SITE CONTROLLER


1 2

COMMUNICATIONS -------------------- -------------------- HALF DUPLEX

*The watchdog is the power supervision of the CPU board and should be enabled
**The battery is the DPT, CPU board, RAM backup.
***These jumpers configure the CPU board for full or half duplex.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-10 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Standard DPT with TDS (Premier B & C)
TDS and TED Connections

MODEL 69 INTERFACE BOX COVER MODEL 69 INTERFACE BOX


(SEE DRAWING ON NEXT PAGE) (UP TO 16 DPTS)

233568-2
(RS-485)
TED UNIT
POS/ PC BOARD
SITE CONTROLLER J2
CNTL

(RS-485)
DPT
J1

110 VAC

233568-1
(RS-485)

GROUND WIRE
CONNECTS HERE

TO DPT
CONNECTOR (DRAIN) NOT CONNECTED 4
(DCC) WHT/BLUE 3
ON TED UNIT (+RS485) GREEN 2
TO DPTS
1 (IF CONNECTED)
(-RS485) RED
J1

TO DPTS
CAUTION: (IF CONNECTED)
One TED unit is
WIRE COLORS
required for up MAY VARY FROM
TO DPTS
to 8 dispensers THOSE SHOWN (IF CONNECTED)
(16 DPTs). More
1 SHIELD (DRAIN)
than 16 DPTs 2 BLACK (DCC)
3 WHITE (+RS485)
require two TED 4 RED (-RS485)
units.
MODEL 69 BOX BOARD (1 0F 4)

!
WARNING: Model 170 TED unit
The Tokheim
Encryption Device
(TED) is a secure
unit.
DO NOT ATTEMPT
TO OPEN.
If the TED unit is
tampered with, the
ENCRYPTION
PROGRAMMING
will be ERASED.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-11
Standard DPT
Tokheim Encryption Device (TED)

TED Mounting Bracket Assembly and Model 69 Box


Cover
MODEL 69 BOX
COVER

TOP

DPT
CONNECTOR

CNTL
CONNECTOR

RED LEDS
(2 PLACES)

GREEN LED
POWER
CORD
CONNECTOR

BOTTOM OF
TED UNIT

Bottom view of TED Mounting Bracket assembly


TO POS/
SITE CONTROLLER
(COLORS MAY VARY)
1 = -RS485
2 = +RS485
3 = DCC
4 = DRAIN (SHIELD)

PC BOARD
J1
GROUND
4321 WIRE
CONNECTED
HERE

1234
J2

TO TED (CNTL)
1 = NOT CONNECTED (DRAIN)
BOTTOM VIEW 2 = (WHT/BLUE) DCC
3 = (GREEN) +RS485
4 = (RED) -RS485

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-12 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Controller Board - Standard DPT with TDS Plus
(Premier B only)
The Standard DPT with TDS Plus Controller board supports Debit functions by

!
WARNING:
interfacing with a Secure PIN Encryption Device (SPED) located behind the 4x6
keypad on each side of a dispenser. The secure PIN encryption device is part of
the Debit module shown in the diagram below.
The TDS Plus Debit
Module is a secure
unit.
DO NOT ATTEMPT
TO OPEN.
If the TDS Plus
Debit Module is
tampered with, the
ENCRYPTION
PROGRAMMING
will be ERASED.

Block Diagram - Standard DPT with TDS Plus

PAPER
SENSOR PRINTER TO POS / SITE
PRINTER CONTROL CONTROLLER
BOARD
PAPER
CUTTER
DPT BOARD DPT BOARD
J5
421844-2 J9 69 INTERFACE BOX J9
421844-2
BUZZER
DISPENSER DISPENSER
J1 MOTHER BOARD
SIDE "A" SIDE "B"
J10 J16 J17 J10
ASSEMBLY
J7

J3 To Circuit Breakers
J12
J6 J11 Blender Power
sides A & B
TDS Plus DEBIT MODULE
Security Debit 240V
J2 J3 J2 J1 J8
Shield Board CASH CARD
4x6 J3 ACCEPTOR READER OPTIONS
J4 J7
Keypad POWER SUPPLY 120V
TRANSFORMER
J4 J5 J6
4 line x
20 Character J1
Display J5
AC Power from
AC Distribution board J14

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-13
Standard DPT
Jumper and Switch Locations for Standard DPT with
TDS Plus Controller Board (421844)
J3 Cash Acceptor
Communications J5 Printer Cable

JU1
Note: Jumpers JU1 & JU3 are
soldered and are not meant to be
SW1
configured in the field

JU4 JU2

JU3
NUMEROUS COMPONENTS
ON THE BOARD HAVE BEEN
Depressing SW2 initiates a hard

JU11
OMITTED IN THIS DRAWING
TO CLARIFY LOCATION OF reset to the DPT controller board
JUMPERS. processor and causes the
dipswitch settings of SW1 to be
read.
SW2
JU5

JU6

JU10
JU8
JU9
JU7

• • •

1
1
1
J6Card Reader J9 Site Controller J12
Communications J7 Secure Pin Pad Communications J10 UDC DPT Power
Communications Communications

Jumper Settings - Standard DPT with TDS Plus


Controller Board
Reference the jumper illustrations and locations on the controller board shown above.
Factory settings: Highlighted areas in the table below
JUMPER DESCRIPTION PINS 1&2 PINS 2&3 OPEN

JU4 WATCHDOG* ENABLED ---------------- DISABLED


JU5 Normally open; when pins 1&2 are enabled, DPT enters diagnositcs.
JU6 Normally open; AC low power detect is not used.
JU2 BATTERY** DISABLED ENABLED ---------------
JU8*** SITE CONTROLLER
HALF DUPLEX --------------- FULL DUPLEX
COMMUNICATIONS
JU9*** SITE CONTROLLER
HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX ----------------
COMMUNICATIONS
JU10*** SITE CONTROLLER
HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX ----------------
COMMUNICATIONS
JU7 SITE CONTROLLER
FULL DUPLEX ---------------- HALF DUPLEX
COMMUNICATIONS
*The watchdog is the power supervision of the CPU board and should be enabled
**The battery is the DPT, CPU board, RAM backup
***These jumpers configure the CPU board for full or half duplex.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-14 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Switch Settings - Standard DPT with TDS Plus Controller
Board (Premier B & C)
SW1, Switch Positions 1 and 8
DPT COMMUNICATION RATE SETTINGS
RS-485 COMMUNICATION RATE SET BY SWITCH SW1
SWITCH POS 1 SWITCH POS 8
UDC COMM2 PORT SITE CNTRLR COMM1 PORT
COMM RATE (BPS) COMM RATE (BPS)
PREMIER
Factory settings:
ON 19,200 ON 4800 1 = ON
OFF not used OFF 9600 8 = OFF

SW1, Switch Position 2


DPT Dispenser side
UDC COMM2 PORT

SWITCH POS. 2 ADDRESS

ON = (Side A) 1 Factory settings:


Side A = ON
OFF = (Side B) 2 Side B = OFF

SW1, Switch Positions 3 through 7


DPT Address settings Site Controller COMM 1 Port
IMPORTANT: Factory settings:
Depending on the site controller used, these DPT Address Side A = address 1
Settings and the Dispenser Address Settings MUST match. Side B = address 2

SWITCH POSITION SWITCH POSITION


ADDRESS ADDRESS
3 4 5 6 7 (1-16) 3 4 5 6 7 (17-32)

ON ON ON ON ON 1 ON ON ON ON OFF 17
OFF ON ON ON ON 2 OFF ON ON ON OFF 18
ON OFF ON ON ON 3 ON OFF ON ON OFF 19
OFF OFF ON ON ON 4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 20

ON ON OFF ON ON 5 ON ON OFF ON OFF 21


OFF ON OFF ON ON 6 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 22
ON OFF OFF ON ON 7 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 23
OFF OFF OFF ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 24
ON ON ON OFF ON 9 ON ON ON OFF OFF 25
OFF ON ON OFF ON 10 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 26
ON OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 27
OFF OFF ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 28
ON ON OFF OFF ON 13 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 29
OFF ON OFF OFF ON 14 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 30
ON OFF OFF OFF ON 15 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 31
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 32

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-15
Standard DPT
Controller Board Connectors Defined for Standard DPT
with TDS Plus
J1 Beeper Connector
1 - Regulated +12 VDC
2 - Beeper On/Off

J3 Cash Acceptor Connector


1 - Cash Acceptor DCC, opto isolated 3 - Cash Acceptor transmit, opto isolated
2 - Cash Acceptor +5VDC, opto isolated 4 - Cash Acceptor receive, opto isolated

J4 Cash Acceptor Switch Sensor Connector


1 - Active low signal, detects open security enclosure
2 - System DCC

J5 Printer Control/Data Connector


1 - Data write command signal 17 - No Connection
2 - Bit 0 data 18 - System DCC, low paper sensor
3 - Bit 1 data 19 - System DCC, printer power supply
4 - Bit 2 data 20 - System DCC, printer power supply
5 - Bit 3 data 21 - +20 VDC printer power supply
6 - Bit 4 data 22 - +20 VDC printer power supply
7 - Bit 5 data 23 - +24 VDC paper cutter power
8 - Bit 6 data 24 - Relay active signal (to start paper cutter)
9 - Bit 7 data 25 - Home position signal for paper cutter
10 - No Connection 26 - No Connection
11 - +5 VDC printer logic power 27 - Paper low sensor (active low)
12 - +5 VDC printer logic power 28 - Data busy (active low)
13 - No Connection 29 - Out of paper signal (active low)
14 - System DCC, printer logic power 30 - Data received by printer signal (active low)
15 - System DCC, printer logic power 31 - Printer error condition signal (active low)
16 - System DCC, paper cutter 32 - Reset printer signal (active low)

J6 Card Reader Connector


1 - Active low signal shows card is fully inserted
2 - Track 2 card data
3 - Active low signal shows card is moving thru unit
4 - Indicates valid Track 2 data
5 - No Connection
6 - +5 VDC (4.75 to 5.25) for card reader logic
7 - System DCC
8 - Indicates valid Track 1 data
9 - Track 1 card data

J7 Secure PIN Pad


1 - No connection
2 - +8V DC Unregulated
3 - -RS485 (inverting) differential signal
4 - +RS485 (non-inverting) differential signal
5 - Vo contrast voltage
6 - No Connection
7 - +VBatt Battery Output Voltage
8 - System DCC
9 - System DCC

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-16 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Controller Board Connectors Defined for Standard DPT
with TDS Plus (continued)
J9 Site Controller Port Connector
1 - System DCC
2 - System DCC
3 - +RS-485 (non-inverting) differential signal
4 - -RS-485 (inverting) differential signal

J10 UDC Port Connector


1 - System DCC
2 - System DCC
3 - +RS-485 (non-inverting) differential signal
4 - -RS-485 (inverting) differential signal

J11 Site Controller Port Connector (Gasboy Interface)


1 - System DCC 4 - Differential receive, non-inverting (Rx+)
2 - System DCC 5 - Differential transmit, non-inverting (Tx+)
3 - Differential receive, inverting (Rx-) 6 - Differential transmit, inverting (Tx-)

J12 Main Power Connector


1 - Regulated +24 VDC (23.5 to 24.5)
2 - Unregulated +8VDC (8 to 12.5)
3 - System DCC

Light Emitting Diodes (LED’s)


The LED will be on when the described signal is active
LED1 Red Serial data is being received by the DPT from the Cash Acceptor
LED2 Green Serial data is being transmitted by the DPT to the Cash Acceptor
LED3 Red Diagnostic test signal defined by software
LED4 Red Receive signal (RS-485) Secure PIN Pad J7
LED5 Green Transmit signal (RS-485) Secure PIN Pad J7
LED6 Red Receive signal (RS-485) Site controller port J9
LED7 Green Transmit signal (RS-485) Site controller port J9
LED8 Red Receive signal (RS-485) UDC port J10
LED9 Green Transmit signal (RS-485) UDC port J10
LED10 Yellow +5VDC Logic power

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-17
Standard DPT
Standard DPT Diagnostics (Premier B & C)

Methods to Enter Diagnostics


The preferred method to enter diagnostics is listed first.
• Enter mode 98, followed by a keypress on the operator interface
keypad
• Jumper JU6 is connected when DPT is powered up (use only
when above method fails).

Diagnostics Entered
When diagnostics is entered, this display appears.

Press Upper Left Key


to Continue

LL = lower left
Once the upper left key is pressed, the diagnostics main menu is displayed:
LR = lower right
LL=Go LR=End UL=Next Instruction Header
UL = upper left
Diagnostic Test Name Menu Window where main menu
UR = upper right
choices scroll through

The top line of text remains fixed, and instructs the operator which key to press
in order to: GO do the test, END diagnostics, or scroll to the NEXT test.

Tests which require operator action will time out within


several seconds and return to the Main Menu if no
operator input occurs within the time-out period. For
example, the Card Reader Test times out in
approximately eight seconds if no operator input
occurs.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-18 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Standard DPT Diagnostics (continued)

TEST
(Test Availability): PROBABLE
S = Standard DPT NORMAL INDICATION CAUSE IF CORRECTIVE ACTION
T = Standard DPT with TDS ABNORMAL
P = Std. DPT with TDS Plus

Version and checksum The version number and N/A N/A


(S, P) checksum of the DPT controller
board software is displayed.
"Version: xxxxxxxx
U13 Checksum = xxxx"

Version Number (T) The version number of the DPT N/A N/A
controller board software is
displayed.

Printer Test Customer display will blank, Defective printer Replace the printer
(S, P) test pattern is printed, paper is
cut Printer paper release Check paper release lever.
If error, display: PRINTER lever is up.
ERROR
If ok, display: TEST Out of paper Check paper.
COMPLETE If fault still exists, replace the
DPT controller board.

Card Reader Test Success or failure indicated on Dirty card reader Clean card reader with Card
(S, P) DPTdisplay. Reader Cleaner, part number
2-232990 (qty. 50). Available
"Enter a card" "Track 1: Ok from Tokheim Service Parts
Track 2: Ok"
"Remove the card" Try card on another card
Defective card reader. Replace the card
reader reader. If fault still exists,
replace the DPT Controller
board.

Card inserted wrong Insert card correctly

Keyboard Test As each key is pressed, the Defective Keypad Replace the keypad.
(S, P) display shows the key #, and a If fault still exists, replace the
tone is heard. DPT controller board.

Read DIP Switch Customer display shows the DIP switch settings Set DIP switches correctly. If
(S, T, P) communication rates and on SW1 not set fault still exists, replace DPT
address settings from DIP correctly Controller board.
switch SW1. (see Switch Settings" in this
section for more information)
(example)
"Comm 1 9600 Addr 1
Comm 2 19200 Addr 1"

Watch Dog Test System reset will occur. (Watch Defective DPT Replace the DPT controller
(S, P) dog enable jumper JU5 must controller board board
be connected)

Display Test For 5 seconds: black squares Defective DPT Replace the display.
(S, P) are displayed, for next 5 display If fault still exists, replace the
seconds, numbers, and letters DPT controller board.
are displayed.

RAM Test Display: RAM TEST IN Defective DPT Check jumper settings.
(S, P) PROGRESS, followed by RAM controller board Replace the DPT controller
OK. If error: IC U5 FAILED. board.

(DPT Diagnostics continued on next page)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-19
Standard DPT
Standard DPT Diagnostics (continued)

TEST NAME
(Test Availability):
PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE
S = Standard DPT NORMAL INDICATION
IF ABNORMAL ACTION
T = STD DPT with TDS
P = STD DPT with TDS Plus

Comm Loop-Back Test & Full Message showing result is Defective DPT Replace the DPT
Duplex Test (S) displayed for each test. (test controller board controller board.
cables are available through
Tokheim Service Parts)

Display Statistics Three sets of four statistics Defective DPT Replace the DPT
(S) are shown for five seconds controller board controller board
each.

Clear Statistics The sets of statistics in Defective DPT Replace the DPT
(S) previous tests are set to controller board controller board
zero. "Stats are cleared"

Print Receipt Header Receipt header is printed Defective DPT Replace the DPT
(S) and paper is cut if header controller board controller board
information has been
downloaded from the POS.

Comm Monitor Test DPT display will indicate Defective DPT Replace the DPT
(S, P) status of each COMM line: controller board controller board
On Line or Off Line.

Read Printer Sensors Determines quantity of Defective printer Replace the printer.
(S, P) paper in printer: Out of paper Add paper. If fault still
PRINTER PAPER FULL exists, replace the
PRINTER PAPER LOW DPT controller board.
PRINTER PAPER OUT

Battery-Backed RAM Test Displays PASS or FAIL as Defective DPT Replace the DPT
(S, P) determined by the RAM test. controller board controller board

Bill Acceptor Test Accepts paper money. Defective Cash Replace the cash
(S, P) Displays the value of the acceptor or DPT acceptor.
money. controller board If fault still exists,
Returns the paper money. replace the DPT
controller board.

Bill Acceptor Vers Shows model number and Defective or Check cash acceptor
(S, P) software version number of disconnected cables, power, and
the cash acceptor. Cash acceptor DPT Controller board
LEDs.

Show All Messages Press upper left key to show Defective DPT Replace the DPT
(S) messages. (Msg 1) Press controller board controller board
LR key to end.

Injection Info Displays injection status of Defective or missing Replace or add TED
(T) module, prompts, and TED unit in network or unit to network or
keypad definition. DPT debit module not replace DPT debit
injected. module.

Show Printer Type "Tear Bar" (Premier B)


(S, P) "Cutter" (Premier C)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-20 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Troubleshooting Standard DPT Communication
Problems ( Premier B & C)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
System cannot If problem appears to be with one dispenser (both sides):
communicate with
a DPT (cannot run Console not polling DPTs Reinitialize Console
sales)
Defective communications Use conventional troubleshooting methods to
cables from model 69 box to site check cable
controller

Defective B & B connector Replace B & B connector

DPT communications board Replace communications board in site


failure in site controller controller

DPT communications cable Connect to correct port


connected to wrong port

Tokheim site controller Properly seat board


communications board not
seated properly

Failure of one DPT, locking up all Remove power from DPTs one at a time
DPTs
If problem appears to be with one dispenser (both sides):

Power supply failure Replace options power supply

DPT power switches not on Turn on DPT power switches

Model 69 box switches set off- Set Model 69 switches to on-line


line

DPT was disabled, then enabled Wait for site controller to time out or power
while a download from the site down, then power up site controller
controller was in process

If problem appears to be with one DPT:


TDS+ debit module failure Replace options power supply

DPT assigned wrong address Verify that all DPTs have unique addresses
on this DPT line. Verify that SW1 address
setting and site controller programmed
addresses are the same.

DPT not activated Activate DPT at site controller

DPT controller board failure. Replace DPT controller board

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-21
Standard DPT
Troubleshooting Standard DPT Communication
Problems ( continued)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Intermittent loss of Noise induced into 1. Verify dispensers, interface boxes, and
communications communication lines consoles are properly grounded per the
installation manual.
2. Verify all equipment is on same electrical
phase.
3. Verify DPT cable is of correct type, size,
and rating.
4. Verify ACH & ACC for lights and
electronics are separate and not crossed
wired (per Installation manual).
5. Verify connections in dispenser and
interface boxes.
DPT lockup due to lower Upgrade DPT software
reliability of old level software

Communication dropout due to Replace protocol converter


failing protocol converter (B & B
connector)

Improperly installed or failing Verify installation and connectors, or replace


cable between interface box and cable
POS

Communication dropout due to Reload and/or repair POS


failing component or file
corruption in POS
Loss of Logical failure on controller or Reload software and/or repair POS/controller
communication on POS perventing certain DPTs
1/3 to 2/3 of DPTs from being polled by POS
on site
DPT constantly Network is off-line Wait for network to come on-line
displays "OUT OF
SERVICE" or Console is in Manager's Mode Wait for manager to exit to sales mode
"PLEASE SEE
CASHIER - OUT Console is completing a shift Wait for shift report to end
OF ORDER" report

Console is not configured Configure console correctly for this DPT


correctly

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-22 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Troubleshooting Standard DPT Display Problems
( Premier B & C)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
DPT display is No power to DPT Check DPT power switch, circuit breaker on
blank options power supply, and circuit breakers
on AC distribution board

DPT display is not connected Connect display to DPT controller

DPT display failure Replace DPT display

Contrast is not set correctly Check contrast adjustment

Defective TDS+ debit module Replace debit module

Keypad failure Turn off power, disconnect the keypad, turn


power back on:
- If the display returns to normal operation,
turn power back off and replace keypad.
- If fault still exists, reconnect keypad, and
check other possible causes.

DPT controller board failure Replace DPT controller board

DPT display is dark Backlight connector is not Connect backlight connector to AC


connected to DPT Distribution board

Contrast is not set correctly Check contrast adjustment

Defective backlight Replace DPT display backlight fluorescent


tube

DPT controller board failure Replace DPT controller board


DPT display has Display connector has been Ensure connector is tight
solid squares on the jarred loose
top line of display Toggle DPT power switch on Options Power
Supply

Defective ribbon cable Replace cable

DPT controller board failure Replace DPT controller board


DPT display is DPT not initialized properly Remove DPT power, remove DPT battery
garbled jumper, replace DPT battery jumper and
restore DPT power

DPT controller board failure Replace DPT controller board

Defective display Replace display

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-23
Standard DPT
Troubleshooting Standard DPT Operational Problems
( Premier B & C)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
DPT keypad does DPT keypad is not connected to Connect the DPT keypad to UDC display
not work UDC display board board

Keypad failure Replace keypad

Defective UDC display board, Replace defective assembly


mother board, or ribbon cable
DPT card reader Card reader not connected to Connect card reader to DPT controller board
does not work DPT controller board

Card reader failure Replace card reader

DPT not activated Activate DPT and let it initialize

DPT controller board failure Replace DPT controller board


DPT will not print No AC power at DPT Turn on DPT power at Options Power Supply
receipts
Paper release lever not engaged Set printer release lever to proper position
on printer

Out of paper Install new roll of paper

Printer connector not connected Make proper connections at the printer or


at DPT printer or DPT contolller DPT controller board
board

Paper jammed Remove paper jam; if necessary, remove


paper cutter assembly

Paper not inserted correctly Insert paper with heat sensitive side up

Did not answer YES to receipt Answer YES to receipt question when it
question appears

Not using heat sensitive paper Obtain correct paper from Tokheim Service
Parts (219-470-4710)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-24 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Troubleshooting Standard DPT Operational Problems
( continued)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Authorization Dispenser not assigned to this Assign dispenser to this DPT in dispenser
request immediately DPT assignment mode
fails
Verify that SW1 address setting and site
controller programmed address are the
same

DPT controller board failure Replace DPT controller board


Authorization Console not configured correctly Correctly configure console for DPT sales
request fails after a
few moments Network failure Console has lost communications with
network

Fuel sale due at console Collect sale and try again

DPT controller board failure Replace DPT controller board


DPT does not Console powered up before the Toggle power on the console while site
prompt customers in site controller was powered up controller is on
regard to fleet and
debit transactions Defective site controller software Install new site controller software

TED injected incorrectly Replace TED unit

DPT debit module not injected Replace DPT debit module

Site controller not enabled for Enable outside debit on site controller
outside debit

TED not installed Install TED in system

DPT controller board software Replace DPT board software with TDS or
does not support debit functions TDS Plus software

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-25
Standard DPT
Troubleshooting Tokheim Encryption Device (TED)
Problems
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
CNTL red LED off, POS / Site controller not polling Reset the POS / Site Controller and force a
red LED flashing DPTs download to the DPTs

DPT red LED off, TED unit did not download Check DPT diagnostics for correct injection
CNTL red LED injection information into the message:
flashing DPTs Incorrect: Replace TED unit
Correct: Call ASR
Both red LEDs off TED unit is unplugged Check the connections on the TED unit
power cord.
Check the 110 VAC outlet for power.
INJ port green LED TED unit not injected Replace TED unit
off, not flashing

INJ port green LED Attempting to load injection Unplug TED unit from 110 VAC outlet, then
continues flashing information plug back in
after five seconds

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-26 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Changing Paper on a Tear-Bar Printer (Premier B)

Reference the illustrations below and on the next page for the following
instructions.

From side "A":


To prevent jamming 1. Install a new paper roll in printer using the instructions found on the printer
and to preserve print frame.
quality, use the thermal 2. After the test receipt has printed, insert the test receipt end through the
paper recommended printer dial receipt slot.
below. 3. Close and lock printer dial. Pull receipt down to tear off.

INSTRUCTIONS

PRINTER DIAL
RECEIPT SLOT

Thermal Paper Specifications


Package: 50 rolls per case
Paper type: Thermal
Part No.: Tokheim 5-230492

Shelf life: 5 years (when stored in darkness below 25° C,


relative humidity of 65%)

The DPT printer paper can be ordered through:


Tokheim Service Parts
voice: (219) 470-4710
FAX: 1-800-866-1999
E-mail: parts@tokheim.com

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-27
Standard DPT
Changing Paper on a Tear-Bar Printer (continued)

Below is a rear view of the tear-bar printer showing the location and orientation
of the printer paper roll.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-28 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Changing Paper on a Standard Printer (Premier C)

1. Unlock and open the left door of the electronics enclosure with a TPX-88
key. The printer is mounted to the back of the door.
2. Push in on the two retaining tabs (‚) to remove the old paper roll.
3. Install a new paper roll with the paper coming off of the roll as shown
To prevent jamming (ƒ).
and to preserve print
4. Route the paper as shown and guide the edge of the paper into the printer
quality, use the thermal
paper recommended mechanism slot („). The printer (with power applied) will sense the
below. presence of the paper and pull the paper into the print mechanism. A test
receipt will be printed and delivered to the receipt chute (not shown).
5. Remove and inspect the receipt.
6. Turn the paper roll back the opposite direction to take up any slack
paper.
7. Close the door and lock it using the TPX-88 key.

ƒ
Thermal Paper Specifications
Package: 50 rolls per case
Paper type: Thermal ‚ ‚
Part No.: Tokheim 1-233712
Shelf life: 5 years
(when stored in
darkness below
25° C, relative
humidity of 65%)

Order printer paper from:


„
Tokheim Service Parts
Phone: (219) 470-4710
FAX: 1-800-866-1999

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 7-29
Standard DPT
Clearing a Paper Jam on a Standard Printer (Premier C)

1. Unlock and open the left door of the electronics enclosure with a
TPX-88 key. The printer is mounted to the back of the door.
2. Pull the paper release lever (‚) down to allow the paper to be
removed from the printer (ƒ) and cutter („) mechanisms. The
release lever is located on the right side of the printer mechanism
as shown in the illustration below.
3. Push in on the two retaining tabs () and remove the paper roll.
4. Pull the paper holder assembly release knob (†) and rotate the
paper holder assembly to the right and up. See illustration on
next page.
5. Turn the printer assembly release knob (‡) counterclockwise until
loose. Carefully rotate the hinged printer assembly away from the
receipt chute (…), allowing it to rest in its full open position. The
printer mechanism and cutter mechanism is now exposed.
6. Rotate the cutter mechanism („) up and away from the printer
mechanism. Gently push out on the release tabs located on both sides
of the printer mechanism (ƒ) while lifting the cutter mechanism.
7. Carefully remove any paper found in the locations shown.
Read CAUTION note on next page.
8. Return the cutter („) to its original position. Rotate the printer
assembly back to its original position and secure it by turning the
printer assembly release knob (‡) clockwise until tight. Pull the
paper holder release knob (†) and rotate the paper holder assembly
back to its original position.
9. Reinstall the paper roll by following the instructions on the previous
page.

 

‚
ƒ "feed" button – Press once to
advance paper one line. Hold to
„ advance paper continuously.
"cut" button – Press to cut the
… paper.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-30 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Standard DPT
Clearing a Paper Jam on a Standard Printer (continued)

! CAUTION
Do not use screwdrivers or any other tools
to remove paper from inside the printer or
cutter mechanisms. Severe damage could
occur. ‡

CAREFULLY REMOVE ANY


PIECES OF PAPER FOUND
IN THESE LOCATIONS
(SEE CAUTION ABOVE)

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 7-31
Standard DPT
Premier B & C Cash Acceptor

Lock Assemblies
Tokheim does not furnish lock assemblies for the Cash Acceptor in order to
assure customer security. Lock assemblies for the Cash Acceptor are available
from:
Midwest Vending Security, Inc.
3350 Secor Road
Toledo, OH 43606
(419) 534-6886

Vault:
Lock, Coded : 60W0750T-219-M7
Lock, Cam : CT-D05
Key : KEY-M743
Cassette:
Lock, Coded : 60W0850T-223-M7
Lock, Cam : CT-C00
Key : KEY-M743

A Premier B
Dispenser Head is
shown in this
illustration. Premier
C uses the same
Cash Acceptor
assembly.

421498-2 ISSUED 2/15/94

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-32 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Standard DPT
Premier B & C Cash Acceptor (continued)

Access to the Cash Acceptor Cassette (Premier B)


1. Unlock and remove the access panel on the side opposite of the cash acceptor
you want to empty.
2. The cassette is now accessible for removal.

Cash Acceptor
Cash Acceptor
Cassette

Premier
Dispenser
Head

Cash Acceptor
Mounting Screw
Locations
DPT Dial
Assembly
Rail for
Product ID Panel

Removing the Cash Acceptor (Premier B)


Refer to the illustration above and on the previous page for the following
instructions.
1. Open the DPT dial assembly to gain access to the cash acceptor mounting
hardware. Refer to the instructions in section 2 for opening the DPT dial.
2. Move the product ID panel to expose cash acceptor mounting screw:
• Remove the two Phillips screws securing the right end cap on the
product ID panel rail.
• Remove the end cap and slide the product ID panel to the right
until the hex head screw below the cash acceptor is exposed.
3. Remove the 3 hex head screws securing the cash acceptor.
4. Open the access panel on the opposite side of the dispenser and remove the
cash acceptor through this opening.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 7-33
Standard DPT
Premier B & C Cash Acceptor (continued)
Access to the Cash Acceptor Cassette (Premier C - 45" only)
1. Using a TPX 88 key, unlock and open the left door of the electronics head
(enclosure).
2. The cassette for the Cash Acceptor on the opposite side of the dispenser is
now accessible for removal.
Open left door on opposite side of dispenser
to remove cash acceptor and cassette.

Premier C Dispenser Head

Cash
Acceptor

Removing the Cash Acceptor (Premier C)


Refer to the illustrations for the following instructions.
1. Open the far right door to gain access to the cash
acceptor mounting hardware.
2. Remove 3 hex washer head screws (shown
below) from the cash acceptor bracket.
3. Remove the cash acceptor from the
dispenser head (out the other side).
4. Remove 4 round-head machine
screws, lockwashers, and hex
nuts securing the bracket to
the cash acceptor.

Remove these screws first

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-34 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Standard DPT
Premier B & C Cash Acceptor (continued)

DIP Switches on MARS Electronics Series 3000 Bill Acceptor


Two banks of dip switches are located on the Cash Acceptor Assembly (Part #
1-321055) as shown below. Position descriptions of the dip switches are shown
in the tables below.

#1 #2

DIP SWITCH BANK #1 DIP SWITCH BANK #2


SW SW
ON OFF ON OFF
# #
1 $1 Bill ALLOWED $1 Bill NOT ALLOWED 1
See the Way Accept Table below.
2 $2 Bill ALLOWED $2 Bill NOT ALLOWED 2

3 $5 Bill ALLOWED $5 Bill NOT ALLOWED 3

4 $10 Bill ALLOWED $10 Bill NOT ALLOWED 4


Do Not Change the Factory Settings
5 $20 Bill ALLOWED $20 Bill NOT ALLOWED 5
6 $50 Bill ALLOWED $50 Bill NOT ALLOWED 6
7 $100 Bill ALLOWED $100 Bill NOT ALLOWED
7 Calibration Mode Normal Operating Mode
8 Test Mode Normal Operating Mode
8 Coupons Allowed Coupons Not Allowed

WAY ACCEPT TABLE

4 WAY 1 WAY 2 WAY 4 WAY

SWITCH 1 OFF ON OFF ON

SWITCH 2 OFF OFF ON ON

1 way = Face up, green seal first


2 way = Face up, both ways
4 way = Face Up or face down, both ways

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 7-35
Standard DPT
Card Reader Cleaning Procedure (Premier B & C)

The Card Reader in the DPT uses a magnetic reader head (much like the one
found in a tape recorder) to read the magnetic stripe on the cards. Periodically,
this heads require maintenance, and in extremely dirty conditions MUST be
cleaned regularly. The recommended method of cleaning involves the use of a
saturated, specially constructed, disposable, cleaning card. Head cleaning MUST
be performed periodically to ensure the integrity of the data being processed, and
to reduce the need for costly service calls.

1. Obtain disposable CREDIT CARD READER CLEANER from Tokheim


Service Parts (P/N: 2-232990; box of 50).

2. Remove cleaning card from the CREDIT CARD READER CLEANER


envelope.

3. Insert cleaning card into the card reader several times. Turn the card over
each time it is inserted so the magnetic head on each side is cleaned.

4. After the cleaning card has been run through the card reader, wait long
enough to allow the cleaning card to dry.

5. Again insert the cleaning card into the reader to allow the dried cleaning card
surface to remove leftover stubborn contaminants.

6. Discard the cleaning card after use.

If a card reader problem existed and cleaning does not correct the problem,
replace the card reader assembly.

Adjusting Contrast of 4 x 20 DPT Display (Premier B & C)


DPT Display Board - Standard DPT & Standard DPT with TDS

Rear View of 4 x 20 Display Board

Connector

CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
Turn the contrast adjustment screw
clockwise to darken the contrast and
counterclockwise to lighten the contrast.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


7-36 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
INSIGHT DPT

Section 8: INSIGHT™ DPT (Premier B & C)


Scope
This section includes information on diagnostic tests, troubleshooting, and
communications settings for INSIGHT DPT, INSIGHT DPT with TDS
(Tokheim Debit System), and INSIGHT DPT with TDS Plus.
General
The INSIGHT DPT allows a customer to perform cash or credit transactions
at the dispenser without entering the store or interacting with a cashier.
The Tokheim Debit System (TDS or TDS Plus) option allows the customer
to perform debit transactions at the dispenser.
The INSIGHT DPT is linked to a Site Controller via the Model 69 Interface
Box using RS-485 communication protocols. See the block diagram of the
INSIGHT DPT on page 8-3.
The following table provides the hardware and software required for the
three types of INSIGHT DPTs:
Type of TED (Tokheim DPT Controller Board DPT Controller
IMPORTANT Dispenser Encryption Device) number Board Software
Be aware that static Payment unit revision number - version #
Terminal located on the UPC label on
electricity can result the bottom of the TED unit
in circuit board
failure. Precautions to InSight DPT Not Applicable 1-422335 MT.PQ.05.00+
prevent static Insight DPT 2-422335 (Rev. 174103 or
discharge should be R.0300 MT.PQ.05.00+
with TDS greater only - with battery)
taken prior to
touching a circuit Insight DPT
Not Applicable 1-422335 MT.PQ.05.00+
board. with TDS Plus

Section 8 Contents
Component List for INSIGHT DPT Assemblies (Premier B & C) ... 8-2
INSIGHT Operation in Native Mode and Graphic Mode ................ 8-2
Subassembly Orientation (Premier B) ........................................... 8-3
INSIGHT Block Diagram (Premier B & C) ..................................... 8-3
INSIGHT DPT Controller Board (Premier B & C)
LED and Test Point Locations ................................................. 8-4
Jumper and Switch Locations ................................................. 8-6
Configuring INSIGHT DPT Controller Board ........................... 8-7
INSIGHT Board Connectors ................................................... 8-9
Graphic DPT Display Board (Premier B & C) .............................. 8-12
Keypad Keycodes (Premier B & C) ............................................. 8-13
Diagnostic Tests (Premier B & C) ................................................ 8-14
Communication Problems (Premier B & C) ................................. 8-17
DPT Display Problems (Premier B & C) ...................................... 8-18
Operational Problems (Premier B & C) ....................................... 8-20
Graphic Printer Problems (Premier B & C) .................................. 8-21
Card Reader Cleaning (Premier B & C) ...................................... 8-21
Changing Paper on a Graphic Printer (Premier B) ...................... 8-22
Clearing a Paper Jam on a Graphic Printer (Premier B) ............. 8-25
Changing Paper on an INSIGHT DPT Printer (Premier C) .......... 8-27
Clearing a Paper Jam on an INSIGHT DPT Printer (Premier C) . 8-28
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-1
INSIGHT DPT
Component List for INSIGHT DPT Assemblies
Includes INSIGHT DPT with TDS & TDS Plus
(Premier B & C)
INSIGHT DPT assemblies consists of a Controller board and may contain
any of the peripheral devices listed below.
• Audio Transducer (beeper)
• Card Reader
• Cash Acceptor
• Graphic Customer Display
• Graphic Customer Display with Softkeys on each side of the
Display
• Graphic Printer (3 versions)
- Printer only
- with 4x6 keypad
- with Debit Module
• Printer (with a paper cutter and low paper sensor)

INSIGHT Operation in Native Mode and Graphic Mode


Operation of the INSIGHT DPT in Native Mode or Graphic Mode is Site
Controller (POS) dependent. No dipswitch or DPT programming changes are
necessary for operation in either mode. If your POS supports graphics, the
INSIGHT DPT will automatically run in Graphic Mode.
To determine if your 1. Native Mode refers to the non-Graphic use of the INSIGHT DPT and
POS can be upgraded Receipt Printer. If your POS (Site Controller) does not support graphics,
to support Graphic the INSIGHT DPT will automatically run in Native Mode.
Mode, please reference
your Site Controller The INSIGHT graphic display will display all messages as text, using
manual or contact four lines centered on the screen.
Technical Support for The Softkeys (ATM-style keypad buttons on each side of the display)
the Site Controller. will not be functional in this mode. The 4-row by 6-column keypad is
used for programming when operating in Native Mode.

2. Graphic Mode refers to the ability of INSIGHT to:


• Utilize all nine text lines of the 5.7" screen rather than just
four.
• Display graphics by using one or more of the 15 animations
stored in INSIGHT or by displaying graphics downloaded by
the site controller/POS.
• Print graphics on the graphic printer, including company
logos and bar codes.
• Operate in an ATM style of operation by letting the customer
select/make purchase decisions using the softkeys located on
each side of the display panel.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-2 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Subassembly Orientation (Premier B)

For Premier C
Subassembly
Orientation, see
Section 7. INSIGHT
components are
located in the same
area as the standard
components.

INSIGHT Block Diagram (Premier B & C)


TO POS / SITE
CONTROLLER J9
320x240 PRINTER
TED
B&W Graphic GRAPHIC DPT
UNIT
Display BOARD
69 INTERFACE BOX 1-422335
CASH J5 DISPENSER
ACCEPTOR J16 J9 SIDE "B"

J3 J17
J10 J16 MOTHER BOARD J10
J6 GRAPHIC DPT ASSEMBLY
CARD BOARD
READER 1-422335
J7

TDS Plus DEBIT MODULE DISPENSER


SIDE "A" AC Power from
Security J1 J12
J2 Debit AC Distribution Board
Shield Board
J13 J14 J15 J5
4x6 J3 240V
J4 J3 J8
Keypad

4 line x J4
20 Character J1 J7
J5 OPTIONS 120V
Display
POWER TRANSFORMER

SUPPLY J6
4x6 1x5 1x5
BUZZER J1 J2
Kepad SoftKeys SoftKeys

To Circuit Breakers
Connection to the
keypad is through Blender Power
the dispenser
display board

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-3
INSIGHT DPT
INSIGHT DPT Controller Board (Premier B & C)

LED and Test Point Locations


The picture below shows its orientation of the INSIGHT DPT controller
board when installed in the dispenser.
Refer to the next page for descriptions of the LEDs and Test Points.

SW1

LEDS

7
6

5
4

LED3
LED8
LEDS

2
1

9
10

JU2

JU5 JU7
BATTERY

P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
GND +5V +8V +12V +24V BAT -5V

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-4 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
INSIGHT DPT Controller Board (Premier B & C)

LEDs and Test Points Defined (Premier B & C)

Status LEDs
Diagnostic LEDs

LE D LE D
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
NUMBER COLOR

Cash Acceptor (J3) serial data


1 Red
received by DPT

Cash Acceptor (J3) serial data


2 Green
transmitted by DPT

3 Red CPU Status (Software defined)

Site Controller communications (J9)


4 Red
Receivedata signal

Site Controller communications (J9)


5 Green
Transmit data signal

UDC communications (J5) Receive


6 Red
data signal

UDC communications (J5) Transmit


7 Green
data signal

8 Yellow +5 VDC Power

Debit Module (J7) Transmit data


9 Green
signal

Debit Module (J7) Receive data


10 Red
signal

Test Points
TEST POINT LABEL VOLTAGE RANGE USED FOR:

P1 -5 VDC -4.75 VDC to -5.0 VDC Display Contrast

DPT Power ON: approx. = TP6


P2 VBATT Backup Battery Power
DPT Power OFF: +3 VDC to +3.4 VDC

P3 +24 VDC +23.5 VDC to +24.5 VDC Graphic Printer Power

P4 +12 VDC +11.4 VDC to +12.6 VDC Beeper Power

P5 +8 VDC +7.25 VDC to +11 VDC Input to Board Power Regulator

P6 +5 VDC +4.75 VDC to +5.25 VDC Output from Board Power Regulator

P7 GND 0 VD C System DCC

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-5
INSIGHT DPT
Jumper and Switch Locations
SW1

JU2

BATTERY

Depressing SW2
initiates a hard reset to
the controller board
JU5 JU7 SW2 processor and causes
the dipswitch settings of
SW1 to be read.
Jumper Settings
JUMPER DESCRIPTION PINS 1 & 2 OPEN Examples of Jumpers
OPEN JUMPER
NORMAL 1 2
JU2 FACTORY USE ONLY DIAGNOSTICS
OPERATION
ENABLED JUMPER
The shaded 1 2
JU5 WATCHDOG* ENABLED DISABLED
areas indicate JUMPER ON
factory settings. JU7 POWER FAIL DETECT ENABLED DISABLED 1 2 3
PINS 1 & 2

*Watchdog is the power supervision of the controller board and should be


enabled

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-6 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Configuring INSIGHT DPT Controller Board

SW1 Switch Settings

INSIGHT Communication Rate Settings


SW1: Positions 1 and 8
RS-485 Communication Rate

UDC Port Comm 2 Site Controller Port Comm 1


SW1 Comm Rate SW1 Comm Rate
Position 1 (BPS) Position 8 (BPS)

The shaded ON 19,200 ON 19,200


areas indicate
factory settings. OFF 9600 OFF 9600

INSIGHT / Dispenser Side Setting


SW1: Position 2

InSight DPT / Dispenser Side Setting


Factory settings:
Side A INSIGHT™ controller SW1 Position 2 Dispenser Side
board has position 2 set
to ON ON A
Side B INSIGHT™ controller
board has position 2 set OFF B
to OFF

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-7
INSIGHT DPT
Configuring INSIGHT DPT Controller Board
(continued)

INSIGHT Address Setting for Site Controller Port COMM 1


SW1: Positions 3 thru 7
SWITCH POSITION # ADDRESS
IMPORTANT! 3 4 5 6 7 (1-16)
The INSIGHT Address
ON ON ON ON ON 1
Setting MUST MATCH
the Dispenser Address OFF ON ON ON ON 2
set in dispenser ON OFF ON ON ON 3
programming. OFF OFF ON ON ON 4
Verify that it is correct
ON ON OFF ON ON 5
upon start-up.
OFF ON OFF ON ON 6
Refer to pages 8-6 for SW1 ON OFF OFF ON ON 7
location. OFF OFF OFF ON ON 8
ON ON ON OFF ON 9
OFF ON ON OFF ON 10
ON OFF ON OFF ON 11
OFF OFF ON OFF ON 12
ON ON OFF OFF ON 13
OFF ON OFF OFF ON 14
ON OFF OFF OFF ON 15
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 16
SWITCH POSITION # ADDRESS
3 4 5 6 7 (17-32)

ON ON ON ON OFF 17
OFF ON ON ON OFF 18
ON OFF ON ON OFF 19
OFF OFF ON ON OFF 20
ON ON OFF ON OFF 21
OFF ON OFF ON OFF 22
ON OFF OFF ON OFF 23
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 24
ON ON ON OFF OFF 25
OFF ON ON OFF OFF 26
ON OFF ON OFF OFF 27
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 28
ON ON OFF OFF OFF 29
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 30
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 31
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 32

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-8 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Configuring INSIGHT DPT Controller Board
(continued)

INSIGHT Board Connectors J15 J14

J10

J9

J5
J3

J16
J7

J6
J2

J4

J12 J1
J1 Beeper Connector
1) Regulated +12 VDC
2) Beeper On/Off

J2 Battery Connection
1) +5 VDC (4.75 to 5.25 VDC)
2) System DCC

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-9
INSIGHT DPT
Configuring INSIGHT DPT Controller Board
(continued)

INSIGHT Board Connectors

J3 Cash Acceptor Connector


1) DCC (for opto isolation) 3) Transmit serial data
2) +5 VDC (for opto isolation) 4) Receive serial data

J4 Cash Acceptor Switch Sensor Connector


1) Security enclosure switch detect (low = open security enclosure)
2) System DCC

J5 Printer Control/Data Connector


1) Data Write command signal 17) DCC
2) Data signal, bit 0 18) DCC
3) Data signal, bit 1 19) DCC (printer power supply)
4) Data signal, bit 2 20) DCC (printer power supply)
5) Data signal, bit 3 21) +20 VDC (19.75 to 20.5, printer p.s.)
6) Data signal, bit 4 22) +20 VDC (19.75 to 20.5, printer p.s.)
7) Data signal, bit 5 23) No Connection
8) Data signal, bit 6 24) No Connection
9) Data signal, bit 7 25) No Connection
10) No Connection 26) +5 VDC* (low paper sensor, anode)
11) +5 VDC (4.75 - 5.25 printer power) 27) Low Paper Sensor** (active low signal)
12) +5 VDC (4.75 - 5.25 printer power) 28) Busy Printer (active low signal)
13) No Connection 29) Paper Out Sensor (active low signal)
14) DCC for printer power 30) Data Received (active low signal)
15) DCC for printer power 31) Printer Error Condition (active low signal)
16) Graphic Printer Detect 32) Reset Printer (active low signal)

J6 Magstripe Card Reader Connector


1) Card fully inserted (active low signal) 6) +5 VDC (4.75 - 5.25)
2) Track 2 card data 7) System DCC
3) Card present in reader (active low signal) 8) Valid track 1 card data
4) Valid track 2 card data 9) Track 1 card data
5) No Connection

J7 DEM Connector (Data Encryption Module, also called Debit Module)


1) No Connection 6) No Connection
2) +8 VDC (7.5 - 15; 10 typical) 7) Not Used
3) -RS485 Communication 8) System DCC
4) +RS485 Communication 9) System DCC
5) LCD Contrast voltage (-5 VDC)

J9 Site Controller RS485 Connector


1) System DCC 3) +RS485 Communication
2) System DCC 4) -RS485 Communication

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-10 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Configuring INSIGHT DPT Controller Board
(continued)

INSIGHT Board Connectors

J10 UDC Connector


1) System DCC 3) +RS485 Communication
2) System DCC 4) -RS485 Communication

J12 Main Power Connector


1) Regulated +24 VDC (23.5 - 24.5)
2) Not used, voltage ranges from 8 to 12.5 VDC
3) System DCC

J13 4 X 6 Keypad Connector


1) System DCC 10) Row # 2
2) System DCC 11) Row # 3
3) No Connection 12) Row # 4
4) No Connection 13) Row # 5
5) Column # 1 14) Row # 6
6) Column # 2 15) Column # 1
7) Column # 3 16) Column # 2
8) Column # 4 17) Column # 3
9) Row # 1 18) Column # 4

J14 4X6 Keyboard Connector


1) System DCC 7) Column # 0
2) Keypad present 8) Column # 1
3) Row # 4 9) Column # 2
4) Row # 5 10) Column # 3
5) Row # 6 11) Column # 4
6) Row # 7 12) Column # 5

J15 Softkeys Connector


1) System DCC 6) Row # 3 11) Row # 4
2) System DCC 7) Row # 2 12) Row # 3
3) Right Side Softkeys Present signal 8) Row # 1 13) Row # 2
4) Left Side Softkeys Present signal 9) Row # 0 14) Row # 1
5) Row # 4 10) Column # 7 15) Row # 0
16) Column # 6

J16 B & W Graphics Display Connector


1) Scan Start Pulse 9) -25 VDC
2) Latch Pulse 10) Data bit 0
3) Bit Clock 11) Data bit 1
4) Frame signal 12) Data bit 2
5) Adjustable Contrast Control voltage 13) Data bit 3
6) +5 VDC (4.75 - 5.25) 14) Display ON/OFF control
7) Contrast voltage supplied by display 15) System DCC
8) System DCC 16) B & W Graphics Display Present signal
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-11
INSIGHT DPT

Adjusting Contrast of Graphic Display

Turn the contrast adjustment screw on the back of the display:


• clockwise to darken the contrast
• counter-clockwise to lighten the contrast

CONNECTS
TO J16 ON
GRAPHIC DPT
J1 BOARD

A miniature, CONTRAST
insulated, straight- ADJUSTMENT
blade screwdriver is
suggested for REAR VIEW OF INSIGHT DPT DISPLAY BOARD
adjusting the
contrast on the
INSIGHT DPT
display board.

J1 B & W Graphics Display Connector


1) Scan Start Pulse 9) -25 VDC
2) Latch Pulse 10) Data bit 0
3) Bit Clock 11) Data bit 1
4) Frame signal 12) Data bit 2
5) Adjustable Contrast Control voltage 13) Data bit 3
6) +5 VDC (4.75 - 5.25) 14) Display ON/OFF control
7) Contrast voltage supplied by display 15) System DCC
8) System DCC 16) B & W Graphics Display Present signal

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-12 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
INSIGHT DPT Keypad Keycodes (Premier B & C)

Keycodes for the various INSIGHT Keypads are shown below. During any
Keypad Test, when a keypad button is pressed, a keycode is displayed. These
“maps” show the keycodes you should see when a keypad button is pressed.

OPERATOR INTERFACE KEYPAD NUMBERS


(KEYPAD NUMBERS 7 & 19 ARE NOT USED)

6 5 4 3 2
1 Remote Keypad Layout
12 11 10 9 8 If your dispenser is equipped with
this keypad, the keycodes for the
18 17 16 15 14 keypad buttons are shown at left.
13
24 23 22 21 20

INSIGHT DPT SOFTKEYS KEY NUMBERS

49 54
Softkey Keypad Layout
50 55 If your dispenser is equipped
with this display/keypad, the
51 56 keycodes for the associated
softkeys are shown at left.
52 57
53 58

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-13
INSIGHT DPT
INSIGHT DPT Diagnostics (Premier B & C)

Methods to Enter Diagnostics


The preferred method to enter diagnostics is listed first.
• Enter mode 98 followed by a key press on the operator
interface keypad
• Press a softkey while turning on power to the dispenser (use
only when above method fails)
• Jumper JU2 is connected when INSIGHT is powered up (use
only when above method fails)

Diagnostics Entered
When diagnostics is entered, this display appears.

Display Version Number

<-- Next

<-- Previous

<-- Execute

<-- Exit

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-14 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
INSIGHT DPT Diagnostics (continued)

TEST NORMAL INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE


NAME IF ABNORMAL ACTION

Display Version No. Version number of DPT N/A N/A


Controller board is
Tests which require
displayed
operator action will "PROM Vers: xxxxxxxx"
time out within several
seconds and return to Printer Test DPT display will blank, Defective printer Replace the printer
24 lines of test pattern,
the Main Menu if no 19 blank lines, paper is
operator input occurs cut, 2 blank lines. (If Out of paper Check paper
within the time-out error, display: If fault still exists,
period. For example, PRINTER ERROR; if replace the DPT
ok, display: TEST Controller board
the Card Reader Test COMPLETE).
times out in
approximately eight Card Reader Test Success or failure is Dirty card reader Clean card reader with
indicated on DPT Card Reader Cleaner,
seconds if no operator
"Enter a card" display: pt. no. 2-232990 (qty.
input occurs. 50) available from
"Remove a card" "Track 1: Ok Service Parts
Track 2: Ok"
Defective card Try card on another
reader card reader. Replace
the card reader. If fault
still exists, replace the
DPT Controller board

Card inserted wrong Insert card correctly

Keyboard Test "Press a key" Defective keypad Replace the keypad.


(4x6 keypad, TDS As each key is If fault still exists,
keypad, or Non- pressed, the display replace the DPT
Debit Softkeys) shows the key #, and a Controller board.
tone sounds.

Graphic Display Display all 8s for 5 Defective display Replace the display.
Test seconds If fault still exists,
replace the DPT
Controller board.

RAM Test Displays RAM TEST IN Defective DPT Replace the DPT
PROGRESS, followed Controller board Controller board.
by RAM OK. If an error
is detected, displays IC
U5 FAILED

Bill Acceptor Test Accepts paper money Defective Cash Replace Cash
Displays the value Acceptor or DPT Acceptor or
Returns the paper Controller board Replace DPT
money Controller board

Comm Monitor Test Display indicates Defective DPT Replace the DPT
status of each COMM Controller board Controller board
line: On Line or Off Line

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-15
INSIGHT DPT
INSIGHT DPT Diagnostics (continued)

TEST PROBABLE CAUSE


NORMAL INDICATION CORRECTIVE ACTION
NAME IF ABNORMAL

Tests which Read DIP Switch DPT display shows the DIP switches not set Set DIP switches
require operator communication rates and correctly correctly. If fault still
address settings by the exists, replace DPT
action (i.e. Card switch: Controller board.
Reader Test) will (see "Configuring
time out and (example) INSIGHT DPT Controller
return to the "Comm 1 9600 Addr 1 Board" in this section for
Comm 2 19200 Addr 1" more information)
Main Menu if no
operator input Debit Display Test Displays small black Defective display on Replace TDS Plus
occurs within the (TDS Plus only) squares for 5 seconds; TDS Plus Debit Module
digits; main menu 5 Module
time-out period.
seconds later

Debit Keyboard Test Press each key; key Defective Keyboard on Replace TDS Plus
(TDS Plus only) number displayed on debit TDS Plus Module Module
display; alert tone sounds

Watch Dog Test (Watch dog enable jumper DPT Controller board Replace the DPT
JU5 must be connected). Controller board.
System reset will occur.

Display Test (4x20) Currently not supported N/A N/A

Display Checksum, Displays checksum for the DPT Controller board Replace the DPT
EPROM on CPU board Controller board

Read Printer Sensors Displays the quantity of Printer may be out of Add paper to the printer
paper in the printer: paper
PRINTER PAPER FULL Defective printer, Replace printer, cable, or
PRINTER PAPER LOW cable, or DPT DPT Controller.
PRINTER PAPER OUT Controller.

Batt Back RAM Test Displays PASS or FAIL as DPT Controller board Replace the DPT
determined by the RAM Controller board
test

Bill Acceptor Vers Shows model number and Defective or Check Cash Acceptor
software version number of disconnected Cash cabling, power, and DPT
the cash acceptor Acceptor Controller board LEDs

Show Printer Type "Tear Bar" (Premier B)


"Cutter" (Premier C)

Show Configuration Displays a list of DPT Informative Test N/A


options with the keywords
YES or NO:
YES = option is present
NO = option is not present

Injection Status Displays injection status of Defective or missing Replace or add TED
module, prompts, and TED module in module to network or
keypad definition. network or DPT board replace DPT Controller
not injected board

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-16 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Troubleshooting INSIGHT DPT Communication
Problems (Premier B & C)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
System cannot If problem appears to be with more than one dispenser:
communicate with
the INSIGHT DPT Console not polling INSIGHT Reinitialize Console
(cannot run sales) DPTs

Defective communications Use conventional troubleshooting methods to


cables from Model 69 box to site check cable
controller

DPT communications board Replace communications board in site


failure in site controller controller

DPT communications cable Connect to correct port


connected to wrong port

Tokheim site controller Properly seat board


communications board not
seated properly

Failure of one DPT, locking up all Remove power from DPTs one at a time
DPTs
If problem appears to be with one dispenser (both sides):
Power supply failure Replace options power supply

INSIGHT DPT power switches Turn on INSIGHT DPT power switches


not on

Model 69 box switches set off- Set Model 69 switches to on-line


line

INSIGHT DPT was disabled, then Wait for site controller to time out or power
enabled while a download from down, then power up site controller
the site controller was in process

If problem appears to be with one INSIGHT DPT:


INSIGHT DPT assigned wrong Verify that all DPTs have unique addresses
address on this DPT line. Verify that SW1 address
setting and site controller programmed
addresses are the same.

INSIGHT DPT not activated Activate INSIGHT DPT at site controller

INSIGHT DPT controller board Replace INSIGHT DPT controller board


failure.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-17
INSIGHT DPT
Troubleshooting INSIGHT DPT Communication
Problems (continued)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Intermittent loss of Noise induced into 1. Verify dispensers, interface boxes, and
communications communication lines consoles are properly grounded per the
installation manual.
2. Verify all equipment is on same electrical
phase.
3. Verify DPT cable is of correct type, size,
and rating.
4. Verify ACH & ACC for lights and
electronics are separate and not crossed
wired (per Installation manual).
5. Verify connections in dispenser and
interface boxes.
DPT lockup due to lower Upgrade DPT software
reliability of old level software

Communication dropout due to Replace protocol converter


failing protocol converter (B & B
connector)

Improperly installed or failing Verify installation and connectors, or replace


cable between interface box and cable
POS

Communication dropout due to Reload and/or repair POS


failing component or file
corruption in POS
Loss of Logical failure on controller or Reload software and/or repair POS/controller
communication on POS perventing certain DPTs
1/3 to 2/3 of DPTs from being polled by POS
on site
INSIGHT DTP INSIGHT Controller board failure Replace INSIGHT Controller board
constantly displays
"PAY AT PUMP Network is off-line Wait for network to come on-line
OPTION NOT
AVAIL. NOW Console is in manager mode Wait for manager to exit to sales mode
PLEASE SEE
CASHIER" Console is doing a shift report Wait for shift report to end

Console is not configured Configure console correctly for this INSIGHT


correctly DPT

See "System cannot


communicate..." on previous
page

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-18 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Troubleshooting INSIGHT DPT Display Problems
(Premier B & C)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
INSIGHT DPT No power to INSIGHT DPT Check DPT power switch, circuit breaker on
display is blank options power supply, and circuit breakers
on AC distribution board

INSIGHT DPT display is not Connect display to INSIGHT DPT controller


connected

INSIGHT DPT display failure Replace INSIGHT DPT display

Contrast is not set correctly Check contrast adjustment

Defective TDS+ debit module Replace debit module

Keypad failure Turn off power, disconnect the keypad, turn


power back on:
- If the display returns to normal operation,
turn power back off and replace keypad.
- If fault still exists, reconnect keypad, and
check other possible causes.

INSIGHT DPT controller board Replace DPT controller board


failure
INSIGHT DPT Backlight connector is not Connect backlight connector to AC
display is dark connected to INSIGHT DPT Distribution board

Contrast is not set correctly Check contrast adjustment

Defective backlight Replace INSIGHT DPT display backlight


fluorescent tube

INSIGHT DPT controller board Replace INSIGHT DPT controller board


failure
INSIGHT DPT INSIGHT DPT not initialized Remove power from INSIGHT DPT and
display is garbled properly restore power to INSIGHT DPT

INSIGHT display board failure Replace display board

INSIGHT DPT controller board Replace DPT controller board


failure
Check diagnostics to verify that the problem
is not with the site contoller

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-19
INSIGHT DPT
Troubleshooting INSIGHT Operational Problems
(Premier B & C)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
INSIGHT 4 x 6 INSIGHT keypad is not Connect the DPT keypad to UDC display
keypad on printer connected to UDC display board board
dial (if installed)
does not work Keypad failure Replace keypad

Defective UDC display board, Check diagnostics to verify problem is not


mother board, or ribbon cable the site controller

Old version software on INSIGHT Upgrade software


controller
INSIGHT card Card reader not connected to Connect card reader to DPT controller board
reader does not INSIGHT DPT controller board
work
Card reader failure or dirty Clean or replace card reader

INSIGHT DPT not activated Activate INSIGHT DPT and let it initialize

INSIGHT DPT controller board Replace INSIGHT DPT controller board


failure
INSIGHT graphic No AC power at INSIGHT DPT Turn on INSIGHT DPT power at Options
printer will not print Power Supply
receipts
or Paper release lever not engaged Set printer release lever to proper position
INSIGHT graphic on printer
printer did not print
test receipt after Out of paper Install new roll of paper
changing paper
Printer connector not connected Make proper connections at the printer or
at INSIGHT DPT printer or INSIGHT DPT controller board
INSIGHT DPT controller board

Paper jammed Remove paper jam; if necessary, remove


paper cutter assembly

Paper not inserted correctly Insert paper with heat sensitive side up

Did not answer YES to receipt Answer YES to receipt question when it
question appears

Not using heat sensitive paper Obtain correct paper from Tokheim Service
Parts (219-470-4710)

Printer failure Replace printer

INSIGHT DPT controller board Replace INSIGHT DPT controller board


failure

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-20 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Troubleshooting INSIGHT Operational Problems
(continued)
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Softkeys keypad Keypad not connected to DPT Connect to J15
does not work Controller board at connector
J15

Keypad not connected to keypad Connect keypad to harness


harness

Site controller has not enabled Verify keypad operation in diagnostic mode
the softkeys

Mode 29 not programmed See mode 29 in Premier Programming


correctly manual
Authorization Dispenser not assigned to this At the site controller, assign dispenser to this
request immediately INSIGHT DPT INSIGHT DPT in dispenser assignment
fails mode.
Verify that SW1 address setting and site
controller programmed address are the
same.
Verify communications in diagnostics mode.

INSIGHT controller board failure Replace INSIGHT DPT controller board


Authorization Console not configured correctly Correctly configure console for INSIGHT DPT
request fails after a sales
few moments
Network failure Console has lost communications with
network

Fuel sale due at console Collect sale and try again

DPT controller board failure Replace INSIGHT DPT controller board


DPT does not Console powered up before the Toggle power on the console while site
prompt customers in site controller was powered up controller is on
regard to fleet and
debit transactions Defective site controller software Install new site controller software

TED injected incorrectly Replace TED unit

DPT debit module not injected Replace DPT debit module

Site controller not enabled for Enable outside debit on site controller
outside debit

TED not installed Install TED in system

DPT controller board software Replace DPT board software with TDS or
does not support debit functions TDS Plus software
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-21
INSIGHT DPT
Card Reader Cleaning (Premier B & C)
The Card Reader in the INSIGHT uses a magnetic reader head (much like the
kind found in tape recorders) to read the magnetic stripe on the cards.
Periodically, this head requires maintenance, and in extremely dirty
conditions MUST be cleaned regularly. The recommended method of
cleaning involves the use of a saturated, specially constructed, disposable,
cleaning card. Head cleaning MUST be done periodically to ensure the
integrity of the data being processed, and to reduce the need for costly and
time-consuming service calls.

Order credit card 1. Obtain a disposable CREDIT CARD READER CLEANER from
cleaners from: Tokheim Service Parts.
Tokheim Service Parts
Phone: (219) 470-4710 2. Remove cleaning card from the CREDIT CARD READER
FAX: 1-800-866-1999 CLEANER envelope.
Case of 50
3. Insert and remove the cleaning card (fiber side towards the magnetic
Part Number 2-232990
head) in the card reader several times.

4. After the cleaning card has been run through the card reader, wait long
enough to allow the cleaning card to dry.

5. When dry, again insert the cleaning card into the reader to allow the dry
cleaning card surface to remove leftover stubborn contaminants.

6. Discard the cleaning card after use.

In the event that cleaning does not solve the problem, replace the card
reader assembly.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-22 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Changing Paper on a Graphic Printer – Premier B

1. Insert the TPX-88 key and turn


clockwise to unlock the printer dial.
Gently pull on the top of the printer
dial, allowing it to swing forward.
2. Tip the paper holder back as shown. 
Remove the old paper roll and
spindle (picture ).
3. Put the new paper roll onto the
spindle as shown below left (picture
‚). It is very important which way
the paper comes off the roll.

“
4. Replace the paper roll and spindle to
the spindle holder slots (picture ƒ) routing
the paper path as shown.

ƒ
‚
Paper for the graphic printer
must be ordered from:
Tokheim Corporation
Service Parts Division
P.O. Box 663
Fremont, IN 46737

Part Number: 7-230492


(50-roll case)

Phone: 219-470-4710
Fax: 1-800-866-1999

„
5. Fold the loose end of the paper roll
½" onto itself. Guide the folded
edge of the paper into the slot
shown in picture „.
6. The printer will sense the presence
of the paper and pull the paper into
the print mechanism. A test receipt
will be printed and delivered to the
receipt chute.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-23
INSIGHT DPT
Changing Paper on a Graphic Printer – Premier B
(continued)

7. While rotating the paper …


holder back into the locked
position, spin the paper roll
to take up the slack paper
(shown in picture …).

8. Close Printer Dial. Turn the TPX-88 key counterclockwise to lock.


9. Open the receipt door and remove the †
receipt as shown in picture †. The test
receipt should look similar to the one
shown in picture ‡.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-24 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Changing Paper on a Graphic Printer – Premier B
(continued)

Rear view of the Graphic Printer showing location and orientation of the
printer paper roll.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-25
INSIGHT DPT
Clearing a Paper Jam on a Graphic Printer – Premier B

1. Insert the TPX-88 key and turn


clockwise to unlock the printer
dial. Gently pull on the top of 
the printer dial, allowing it to
swing forward (picture ).

‚
2. Lightly push down on the tab as shown in
picture ‚. This is a friction fit, so it won't
take much to get it loose.

3. Swing the printer assembly away from the Printer Dial (picture ƒ). This
allows access to the paper jam.
ƒ

CIRCLED SLOTS REFER TO STEP 6.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-26 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
INSIGHT DPT
Clearing a Paper Jam on a Graphic Printer – Premier B
(continued) PRINTER
PAPER RELEASE
LEVER

4. If the paper jam is „


between the cutter and
the print mechanism, lift CUTTER
the paper release lever
shown in picture „ and
raise the print
mechanism. This allows
the paper to slide through
the print mechanism as
shown in picture …. …
5. After the jam has been
cleared, reinstall paper
into the printer following
the directions for paper
roll replacement.
6. Return the †
printer towards
the printer dial.
While doing SLOT

so, make sure


that the tabs
TAB
shown in ‡
picture †
slides into the
slots as shown
in picture ƒ
(previous page,
step 3) and
picture ‡ above right.
FEED BUTTON
7. Two buttons are provided to assist ˆ
with paper handling. The Feed FEED / CUT BUTTON
Button, when pressed
momentarily, will advance the
receipt paper one line. If the Feed
Button is held down, the receipt
paper will continuously feed until
the button is released. The Feed/
Cut Button, when pressed, will
print a test receipt, cut the paper,
and deliver the test receipt to the
receipt chute.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 8-27
INSIGHT DPT
Changing Paper on an INSIGHT™ DPT Printer –
Premier C

1. Unlock and open the left door of the electronics enclosure with a TPX-88
key. The printer is mounted to the back of the door.
2. Pull out on the two retaining tabs (‚) to remove the old paper roll.
3. Install a new paper roll with the paper coming off of the roll as shown
To prevent jamming (ƒ).
and to preserve print 4. Route the paper as shown and guide the edge of the paper into the printer
quality, use the mechanism slot („). The printer (with power applied) will sense the
thermal paper presence of the paper and pull the paper into the print mechanism. A test
recommended below. receipt will be printed and delivered to the receipt chute (not shown).
5. Remove and inspect the receipt.
6. Turn the paper roll back the opposite direction to take up any slack paper.
7. Close the door and lock it using the TPX-88 key.

Thermal Paper Specifications:


Package: 50 rolls per case
Paper type:
Part No.:
Thermal
Tokheim 7-230492
‚ ‚
Shelf life: 5 years
(when stored in
darkness below
25° C, relative
humidity of 65%)

Order printer paper from:


ƒ
Tokheim Service Parts
Phone: (219) 470-4710
FAX: 1-800-866-1999

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-28 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
INSIGHT DPT
Clearing a Paper Jam on an INSIGHT DPT Printer –
Premier C
1. Unlock and open the left door of the electronics enclosure with a
TPX-88 key. The printer is located on the back of the door.
2. Push the paper release lever () down and pull the paper up
from the printer (‚) and cutter (ƒ) mechanisms. The release
lever is located to the right side of the printer mechanism as
shown below.
3. Pull the top of the receipt chute („) toward you so that it rests in
a fully open position as shown on the next page.
4. Rotate the cutter mechanism (ƒ) down.
5. Inspect the printer and the cutter mechanism for paper jams.
Carefully remove any paper found in the locations shown.

! CAUTION
Do not use screwdrivers or any other tools to remove
paper from inside the printer or cutter mechanisms.
Severe damage could occur.

6. Return the printer and cutter mechanisms to their original


position. Rotate the receipt chute back to its original position.
7. Reinstall the paper by following the instructions on the
previous page.

"FEED" button – Press once to


advance paper one line. Hold to
‚  advance paper continuously.
"F/CUT" button – Press to print, cut,
ƒ and deliver a test receipt to the receipt
chute.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 8-29
INSIGHT DPT
Clearing a Paper Jam on an INSIGHT DPT Printer –
Premier C (continued)
! CAUTION
Do not use screwdrivers or any other tools to
remove paper from inside the printer or cutter
mechanisms. Severe damage could occur.

‚
ƒ
„
„

CAREFULLY
REMOVE ANY ‚
PIECES OF
PAPER FOUND IN
THESE
LOCATIONS
(SEE CAUTION
ABOVE)

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


8-30 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
MaxVac System

Section 9: MaxVac Vapor Recovery System


(Premier B & C)
Scope
This section provides information about the general operation of the Tokheim
MaxVac Vapor Recovery System. It is important that you understand the
requirements of the system before you attempt to operate or maintain the
equipment. Diagnostic and Technical procedures should ONLY be performed by
a Tokheim Authorized Service Representative (ASR).

Theory of Operation
Generally, the Tokheim MaxVac Vapor Recovery System operates by providing
vacuum to the vapor recovery plumbing which is in direct proportion to the fuel
delivery rate of the dispenser. In doing so, a vacuum is produced at the nozzle
spout which will pull in vapors (produced within the unsealed vehicle fuel tank
fill pipe) before they can escape into the atmosphere. In this way the system
efficiently manages the fuel vapors without the need of a cumbersome, bellows-
style nozzle.

The drawing on the next page depicts the overall system. The flow pattern of the
vapors produced during fueling operation are indicated as they are directed into
the storage system.

Section 9 Contents
Underground Tank & Piping Diagram ............................................ 9-2
Nozzle / Vehicle Fill Pipe ................................................................ 9-3
MaxVac System Components ........................................................ 9-3
MaxVac System Certification Requirements .................................. 9-4
MaxVac System Tests ................................................................... 9-4
Problems at Power-Up? ................................................................ 9-5
MaxVac Error LEDs ....................................................................... 9-6
MaxVac Multiplex Board ................................................................ 9-8
MaxVac Blend Control Board ......................................................... 9-9
MaxVac Power Supply Board ...................................................... 9-10
MaxVac Motor Control Board ........................................................ 9-11
MaxVac Mini Motor Control Board ............................................... 9-13

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 9-1
MaxVac System

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


9-2 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
MaxVac System
Nozzle/Vehicle Fill Pipe
This drawing shows that the vapors are drawn into the nozzle through the radial
openings in the spout end.

Nozzle Efficiency
Compliance Device
(ECD)

Radial Spout Holes


(Vacuum Ports)

Vehicle Fill Pipe

Fill Pipe Baffle and Filler Neck Vent Holes

Vapors generated during fill

MaxVac System Components


The fuel vapors are drawn into the system by means of the vacuum created by the
motor pump located in the dispenser raceway. The vapors are then conducted
through the pump, combined with vapors from the other side of the dispenser,
and are pumped down and through the piping, into the top of the underground
storage tanks (UST).
Electrically Driven Variable
Speed Vapor Pump Vacuum Pump Outlet

r
M
l
Vacuum
Pump
Inlet

Adapter Break-A-Way, Coaxial


Hoses and "Bootless" Nozzle

See Nozzle drawing above

MaxVac
Electronics

Direction of Vapors
Tokheim Premier Dispenser

Vapor Return Line to storage System

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 9-3
MaxVac System
MaxVac System Certification Requirements
To insure that the MaxVac vapor recovery system remains in compliance with
California Air Resources Board (CARB) certification requirements, please refer
to the CARB Executive Order G-70-154. The CARB Executive Order includes
the following information:
• Exhibit 1 - List of the equipment certified for use with the
MaxVac system (#0431)
• Exhibit 2 - Installation and performance specifications for
the system (#0432)
• Exhibit 3 - Procedure for testing the static pressure integrity
of the vapor recovery system (#0433)
• Exhibit 4 - Ten gallon per minute limitation compliance
verification procedure (#0434)
• Executive Order G-70-154 - Includes all Exhibits (#0430)
A copy of the CARB Executive Order is available through Tokheim’s FAX-On-
Demand service (24-hours-a-day, 7-days-a-week). To access this service, dial
(219) 484-1864 and follow the automated instructions to retrieve your document.
To receive the complete CARB Executive Order or separate exhibits, request the
appropriate 4-digit document number shown above.

MaxVac System Tests


Preform the following tests to insure that the MaxVac system is functioning
properly and has no leaks in the vapor tube connections. See the MaxVac
Owner’s Manual, Form 4857 for testing the MaxVac vapor recovery system.
• Vapor system visual check
• Static Pressure Decay Test
• MaxVac System Air-to-Liquid (A/L) Ratio Test
• Dispenser flow rate check

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


9-4 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
MaxVac System
Problems at Power-Up?
An error code is displayed in the volume display when the dispenser detects
a problem. The following chart should be referred to when error codes 23,
24, or 31 through 34 are displayed AND an error LED (see below) is
illuminated (located either on the Multiplex board [non-blend] or on the
Blend Control board [blenders]).
Error conditions are reset by turning the MaxVac Power Supply switch OFF,
then ON or by going into, then exiting, Manager mode. Error conditions are
also reset by pressing and holding the lower left key of the operator interface
keypad for 5 seconds.

OPERATOR
INTERFACE
KEYPAD

ERROR CONDITIONS ARE RESET BY PRESSING AND HOLDING


THE LOWER LEFT KEY OF THE OPERATOR INTERFACE KEYPAD
FOR 5 SECONDS.
™

Note: Report error occurrences to your Authorized Service Representative (ASR)

Check all of the following as possible


Blender Dispenser reasons for MaxVac errors:
ERR 23 Product 1 pulser is disconnected
• Power Supply is turned off
ERR 24 Product 2 pulser is disconnected • Circuit breaker tripped (on
Power Supply Assembly)
Non-Blend Dispenser • Overcurrent or locked
rotor condition (plugged
ERR 3x Number of dispenser pulser errors for
inlet/outlet vapor line)
hose (x) has reached the pulser error limit programmed
• Bad speed feedback signal
in manager mode F21. The sale is terminated as a bad
(disconnected speed
sale.
NOTE: If an err # is displayed and an error
sensor)
LED is ON, then the problem is a MaxVac • Motor controller IC too hot
problem. If no error LED is on, then the (It will shut itself off)
problem is as described above. • Low motor drive voltage

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 9-5
MaxVac System
MaxVac Error LEDs
LEDs are normally off, an error is indicated when the LED is ON.

LED 2 - SIDE B
ERROR
(WHEN ON)

LED 1 - SIDE A
ERROR
(WHEN ON)

J4 BLEND
CONTROL
INTERFACE

Blend Control Board

J4 MAXVAC
INTERFACE

LED 2 - SIDE B
ERROR
(WHEN ON)

LED 1 - SIDE A
ERROR
(WHEN ON)

Rev. 4 Multiplex Board

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


9-6 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
MaxVac System
MaxVac Error LEDs (continued)
Revision 5 only Multiplex boards (part #421420-1) have an eight position
dip switch labeled SW2. These switches control the operation of the MaxVac
Motor Pumps. A switch in the ON position allows operation of the MaxVac
Motor Pump for that hose outlet. A switch in the OFF position will not let
the MaxVac Motor Pump work for that hose outlet (typically used for diesel
hose outlets). Boards are shipped from the factory with all positions of
switch SW2 in the ON position. If these switches were not set when the
Multiplex board was installed into the card cage, refer to the chart below to
set the switches for your dispenser.

SW2
SWITCH CONTROLS
POSITION HOSE
1 A1
2 A2
3 A3
4 A4
5 B1
6 B2
7 B3
8 B4

SW2

J4 MAXVAC
INTERFACE

LED 2 - SIDE B
ERROR (WHEN ON)

LED 1 - SIDE A
ERROR (WHEN ON)

Rev. 5 Multiplex Board

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 9-7
MaxVac System
MaxVac Multiplex Board (Part no. 421420)
Functions of the MaxVac Multiplex Board:
• Pump handle interface and identification
• Pulser selection
• Motor and valve control selection
• MaxVac interface
Differences from the 417333 Multiplex board:
• Right angle connector J4 for MaxVac
• LED’s for visual indication of dispenser errors
• Circuitry to allow the electronics to display errors
J4 MaxVac Interface Connector
1 Pulser 1A 6 No Connection
2 Pulser 2A 7 Error Side A
3 No Connection 8 Error side B
4 Pulser 1B 9 +5 VDC
5 Pulser 2B 10 DCC

LED1- MAXVAC SIDE A LED 2 - MAXVAC SIDE B TP1 TP2 TP3


ERROR (WHEN ON) ERROR (WHEN ON) 15VDC 5VDC GND

J4

To Mother Bd. J7 To Mother Bd. J13 To Mother Bd. J26

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


9-8 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
MaxVac System
Blend Control Board - 421574
• Used only in Blend dispensers
• Calculates blending ratio
• Receives pulser and handle signals
• Monitors for pulser disconnect
• Controls motors, blending valves, and dual-flow valves
• Receives commands from and reports status to the master
processor on the Expanded Computer Board
• Supplies Motor Control for MaxVac system
• 421186 (for non MaxVac)

J4 MaxVac Interface Connector


1 Pulser 1A 6 No Connection
2 Pulser 2A 7 Error Side A
3 No Connection 8 Error side B
4 Pulser 1B 9 +5 VDC
5 Pulser 2B 10 DCC

LED1- MAXVAC SIDE A LED 2 - MAXVAC SIDE B


ERROR (WHEN ON) ERROR (WHEN ON)

J4

TO MOTHER BD J7 TO MOTHER BD J13 TO MOTHER BD J26

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 9-9
MaxVac System
The MaxVac Power Supply Board (Part no. 421271)
• Supplies power for the MaxVac vapor recovery system
• Provides visual indicators for power and error conditions
• Current protection via circuit breakers
Wiring diagrams SW2 Side A power Turns on 20V and 36V power for side A
for the MaxVac SW1 Side B power Turns on 20V and 36V power for side B
system are
available in
Section 4 of this
TP6,1 GND
manual. TP5 20V side A 19.0V - 21.0V
TP4 20V side B 19.0V - 21.0V
TP3 36V side A 35.0V - 37.0V
TP2 36V side B 35.0V - 37.0V

SW2

LED3

LED 3 - SIDE A DC POWER 20V, 36V


TP6
LED 2 - 36V OVERVOLTAGE SIDE A, B
TP5
TP4
TP3
LED 1 - SIDE B DC POWER 20V, 36V TP2
TP1 J4
LED2
END VIEW OF LED’S
J3

LED1

SW1 J2

J1 J5 J6

Circuit Breakers are connected J1 - AC Input from AC Dist. Bd.


via J2. Circuit Breakers J2 - Circuit Breakers
mounted on the frame of the
J3 - DC Output to Motor Control
assembly:
J4 - From transformer secondary
Volts Current Rating J5/J6 - 120V/240V AC power to
36 DC 2.5A transformer assembly
36 DC 2.5A
20 DC .7A
120 AC 2A

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


9-10 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
MaxVac System
The MaxVac Motor Control Board (Part no. 421280)
For Premier B (45") Series Dispensers Only
• Supplies motor control for the MaxVac vapor recovery system
• Provides visual indicators for power and error conditions
All Jumpers are
factory set. Do
• Provides test points for power and error conditions
not change Error conditions are reset by pressing and holding the lower left keypad
jumper settings. button on the operator interface keypad for 5 seconds.

TP1 = Side A; TP3 = Side B


Individual pin descriptions:
1 GND Ground potential
SIDE A SIDE B
2 Pulser A1 Pulse signal with motor on A/L ADJUST A/L ADJUST
3 5V 4.9V - 5.25V
4 Pulser A2 Pulse signal on blend
product with motor on
5 ERROR 4.8V - 5.0V signal = J4
Error condition
6 GND Ground potential
7 36V 35.0V - 37.0V
8 20V 19.0V - 21.0V TP1
9 15V 14.75V - 15.25V
10 6.2V 6.2V - 6.5V

LED 1 SIDE A POWER,


ERROR

J5
LED 2 PULSER A1, A2
J1

J6
LED 3 MOTOR A, B J2

LED 4 PULSER B1, B2


J7

LED 5 SIDE B POWER,


ERROR J8

LED’s: ON = Positive indication


TP3
Examples:
LED 5 = ON, ON (both on)
indicates power is on for side B,
and an error has occurred for
side B. J3
LED 3 = OFF, ON indicates that
Motor A is off, Motor B is on (LED
blinks when running).
J9
A2 and B2 LED’s are for Blended
products only

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 9-11
MaxVac System
The MaxVac Motor Control Board (continued)

Connectors
J1 Power side A
1 - Phase 1
2 - Phase 2
Wiring diagrams 3 - Phase 3
for the MaxVac
system are
available in J2 DC Power Input
Section 4 of this 1, 2 - DCC (DC Common)
manual.
3 - 20 VDC, side A
4 - 20 VDC, side B
5 - 36 VDC, side A
6 - 36 VDC, side B

J3 Power side B
1 - Phase 1
2 - Phase 2
3 - Phase 3

J4 Test Output (Factory use only)

J5, J7 Connectors for future use

J6, J8 Sensors side A, side B


1 - Sensor C
2 - Sensor B
3 - Sensor A
4 - +6.2 VDC
5 - DCC
6 - Motor CFG

J9 Pulser Input
1 - Pulser 1A
2 - Pulser 2A
3 - Premier reset
4 - Pulser 1B
5 - Pulser 2B
6 - N/C
7 - Error side A
8 - Error side B
9 - +5 VDC
10 - DCC

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


9-12 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
MaxVac System
The MaxVac Mini Motor Control Board - Part no. 421449
For Premier B (30") & Premier C Series Dispensers
All Jumpers are • Supplies motor control for the MaxVac vapor recovery system
factory set. Do • Provides visual indicators for power and error conditions
not change • Provides test points for power and error conditions
jumper settings. Error conditions are reset by pressing and holding the lower left keypad button
on the operator interface keypad for 5 seconds.

Test Points
1 5V 4.9V - 5.25V
2 Sensor A Motor On
3 6.2V 6.2V - 6.5V
LED Indicator Examples: 4 GND Ground potential
5 15V 14.75V - 15.25V
LED 5 = ON indicates power
is on and an error has 6 20V 19.0V - 21.0V
occurred. 7 36V 35.0V - 37.0V

LED 3 = ON indicates the


MaxVac Motor on LED 1 Pulser 1
(LED blinks when running). LED 2 Pulser (Blend)
LED 3 Motor
LED 2 is for Blended products LED 4 Power
only. LED 5 Error

R43 A/L ADJUST

LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5


TEST POINTS 1 – 3 TEST POINTS 4 – 7

MaxVac Mini Motor Control Board - 421449

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 9-13
MaxVac System
The MaxVac Mini Motor Control Board (continued)

Connectors
Wiring diagrams J1 Sensors to Vapor Pump Assembly
for the MaxVac 1 - Sensor C
system are 2 - Sensor B
available in 3 - Sensor A
Section 4 of this
4 - +6.2 VDC
manual.
5 - DCC
6 - Motor CFG

J2 Power to Vapor Pump Assembly


1 - Phase 1
2 - Phase 2
3 - Phase 3

J3 DC Power Input
1 - DCC (DC Common)
2 - No Connection
3 - 20 VDC
4 - 36 VDC

J4 Pulser Input
1 - Pulser 1
2 - Pulser 2
3 - Premier Reset
4 - MaxVac Error
5 - +5 VDC
6 - DCC

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


9-14 Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000
Soleniod Coils

Section 10: Solenoid Valve Coil Diagnostics


Premier B & C

Scope
This section will explain the diagnostic procedures available for testing
dual-flow valves and their coils in a Tokheim dispenser.

Section 10 Contents
Checking Coil Voltages ................................................................. 10-2
Checking Coil Resistance ............................................................. 10-3
Wiring Diagrams ........................................................................... 10-4

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 10-1
Soleniod Coils
Checking Coil Voltages
1. Equipment Needed: Multimeter with AC Volts and Ohms test ranges.

2. Set the multimeter on AC Volts and check the actual voltage at the lead
wire harness on the coil. NOTE: RED is the common lead.

3. FOR 110/120 VAC Applications


When the valve is in full-flow, the voltage should be:
50Hz. 60Hz.
Across the red and yellow leads: 110 VAC 120 VAC
Across the red and black leads: 110 VAC 120 VAC
Across the yellow and black leads short circuit (0 volts)

When the valve is in low-flow, the voltage should be:


50Hz. 60Hz.
Across the red and yellow leads: 110 VAC 120 VAC
Across the red and black leads: 0 VAC 0 VAC
Across the yellow and black leads 110 VAC 120 VAC

When the valve is off (i.e., no flow), the voltage should be:
50Hz. 60Hz.
Across the red and yellow leads: 0 VAC 0 VAC
Across the red and black leads: 0 VAC 0 VAC
Across the yellow and black leads 0 VAC 0 VAC

4. FOR 220/240 VAC Applications


When the valve is in full-flow, the voltage should be:
50Hz. 60Hz.
Across the red and yellow leads: 220 VAC 240 VAC
Across the red and black leads: 220 VAC 240 VAC
Across the yellow and black leads short circuit (0 volts)

When the valve is in low-flow, the voltage should be:


50Hz. 60Hz.
Across the red and yellow leads: 220 VAC 240 VAC
Across the red and black leads: 0 VAC 0 VAC
Across the yellow and black leads 220 VAC 240 VAC

When the valve is off (i.e., no flow), the voltage should be:
50Hz. 60Hz.
Across the red and yellow leads: 0 VAC 0 VAC
Across the red and black leads: 0 VAC 0 VAC
Across the yellow and black leads 0 VAC 0 VAC

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


10-2 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Soleniod Coils
Checking Coil Voltages (continued)
5. OVERVOLTAGE: If the voltage is over the nominal voltage, the coil
could eventually overheat causing coil turns to short and ultimately
causing an open circuit.

6. UNDER-VOLTAGE: If the voltage is less than 85% of the rated


voltage, there might be insufficient voltage to operate the valve.
85% of 110VAC @ 50Hz. = 94 VAC minimum
85% of 120VAC @ 60Hz. =102 VAC minimum
85% of 220VAC @ 50Hz. =187 VAC minimum
85% of 240VAC @ 60Hz. =208 VAC minimum

7. Any indication of voltage not being applied to the valve is an indication of


a control circuit problem.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 10-3
Soleniod Coils
Checking Coil Resistance
1. PRECAUTIONS:
a. UNPLUG the valve from the wire harness.
b. If the valve has been energized, let the coil COOL to room
temperature.
If the coil is HOT, it
can increase the
c. Set the multimeter to measure resistance (Ohms).
resistance (Ohm) d. Make sure the multimeter leads make solid contact with the
measurements by metal connector prongs in the wire harness plug holes.
as much as 20%. e. Make sure the multimeter probe tips are not touching each
other or your fingers.

2. Ohms readings for 110VAC@50Hz. / 120VAC@60Hz. coils should be:


Across the red and yellow leads: between 225 and 275 ohms
Across the red and black leads: between 225 and 275 ohms
Across the yellow and black leads: between 450 and 550 ohms
(should be the sum of the previous two readings)

3. Ohms readings for 240VAC@60Hz. coils should be:


Across the red and yellow leads: between 963 and 1,177 ohms
Across the red and black leads: between 963 and 1,177 ohms
Across the yellow and black leads between 1,926 and 2,354 ohms
(should be the sum of the previous two readings)

3. Ohms readings for 230VAC@50Hz. coils should be:


Across the red and yellow leads: between 1,080 and 1,320 ohms
Across the red and black leads: between 1,080 and 1,320 ohms
Across the yellow and black leads between 2,160 and 2,640 ohms
(should be the sum of the previous two readings)

4. All of the above ohm readings assume that the coil is at ambient (room)
temperature.

5. Any ohm reading showing a short circuit or open circuit or ohms readings
out of the above ranges is an indication of a coil, lead-wire crimp, or
conduit wire problem. If the ohm readings are correct, then this indicates

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


10-4 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Soleniod Coils
Wiring Diagrams

YELLOW

B
NO FLOW
BLACK
A = OPEN
120/240VAC
B = OPEN
VALVE
RED

YELLOW

LOW FLOW
B
BLACK
A = CLOSED
120/240VAC
B = OPEN
VALVE
RED

YELLOW

B
FULL FLOW
BLACK
A = CLOSED
120/240VAC
B = CLOSED
VALVE
RED

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 May 2000 10-5
Soleniod Coils

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


10-6 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Glossary A — B
Section 11: Glossary
A
Ampere, a measuring unit for current flow in a circuit.

AC
Alternating current power, also abbreviated VAC.

AMPS
Another abbreviation for ampere, see A above.

APPROVE
Command from a console or other fuel point controller allowing a sale to
begin. A fueling point remains approved until the nozzle is returned to the
boot.

• In console operation with key arming, the fueling point must


be key-armed before it requests approval. The console sends
the approval command to approve the fueling point.

• In stand-alone operation with no key-arming, the fueling point


is approved immediately when a hose is activated. In key-
arming operation, the fueling point must be key-armed before
a hose can be approved.

ARMING
(See key arming or permanent arming)

ARMING KEY
Also referred to as the attendant’s key. When placed on the keyswitch area,
the dispenser is readied for a transaction. This key is red or blue.

ASR
(Tokheim) Authorized Service Representative.

BAD SALE LIMIT


Once the dispenser exceeds the dispenser error limit on a sale, the sale is
stopped, and the bad sale counter increments by one. When the bad sale
counter exceeds the present limit, the dispenser is stopped and an error code
is displayed.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 11-1
Glossary B — C

BATTERY BACKUP TIME


The time the dispenser will remain powered up after the loss of AC power.

BLEND RATIO
A ratio (generally described in terms of percentages) between two straight-
grade products combined to create a blended product. Example: a 60%
product 1 and 40% product 2 blend would be expressed as a 60/40 blend
ratio.

BLENDED PRODUCT
Product composed of a percentage (blend ratio) of two grades of fuel.

BLENDER DISPENSER
Any of the Premier series of dispensers which allows the mixing of two
grades of fuel to create a mid-range grade.

BLENDING VALVE
Electronically controlled valve used to blend two products at the programmed
blend ratio.

CARD CAGE
The subassembly inside the dispenser which contains the electronic circuit
boards (CPU, interface, etc.).

CB(n)
Circuit breaker (n). Used for over-current protection.

CONSOLE
Device for controlling and monitoring fueling points.

CONSOLE OPERATION
(with key arming) - A fueling point operating mode that allows a sale to
begin only after the arming key is placed on the keyswitch area.
(with permanent arming) - A fueling point operating mode that allows a
sale to begin upon receipt of a valid approval command from the console.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


11-2 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Glossary C — D

CPU
Central Processing Unit. The name of the circuit board which performs all
the “computer” functions for programming and processing fuel sales.

CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check. This test verifies that the CPU board is
functional. A number derived from a block of data, and stored or transmitted
with the data in order to detect any errors in transmission. It is similar to a
checksum, but more complicated. A cyclic redundancy check is often
calculated by adding words or bytes of the data. The receiving computer
recalculates the CRC from the data received and compares it to the value
originally transmitted; if the values are not the same, it indicates a
transmission error.

CUSTOMER SERVICE
Tokheim Solution Center 1-800-866-6762

DECIMAL POINT
Manager's mode F22 sets the decimal point location in the money, volume,
and ppuv displays.

DEFAULT
A value or condition that is automatically set at system initialization and can
be changed by the operator if necessary.

DHC
Dedicated Hose Controller. A Tokheim dispenser controller.

DIP SWITCH
Dual In-line Package; an electronic component containing one or more
switches that control various device parameters or options.

DISPENSER ERROR LIMIT


Limit set in programming that a dispenser can have in any one sale before
sale will be stopped.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 11-3
Glossary D — F
DISPENSER FUNCTION CODE
Set in manager’s mode function F19; specifies whether the dispenser will
operate in stand-alone mode, or with a console, and depending on which mode
is selected, will determine which type or arming is to be used. (See key-
arming and permanent arming.)

DISPLAY ADDRESS
Establishes the dispenser’s fundamental identity with the system software.

DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS
A function available at the dispenser to check the displays and keypad buttons
for proper operation.

DPT
Dispenser Payment Terminal

DUAL-PHASE PULSER
A device in the dispenser that generates two pulse streams, one lagging the
other by 90 degrees (quadrature). It is used by the CPU board to keep track
of volume dispensed.
Premier B: U.S.A. measurement: 1000 pulses = one gallon
Metric measurement: 250 pulses = 1 liter
Premier C: U.S.A. measurement: 400 pulses = one gallon
Metric measurement: 100 pulses = 1 liter

EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. This integrated circuit contains
the operating program for the CPU. This device is directly related to the
software version number.

Err (nn)
An Error code displayed by the dispenser indicating a problem which requires
attention.

FCC
Federal Communications Commission.

F(nn)
Function (nn) of the manager's mode.
Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual
11-4 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Glossary F — L
FUEL BLEND RATIO
(See Blend Ratio)

GPM
Gallons per minute, a rate of flow.

HZ
Hertz, a unit of measure for frequency.

ICONS
Nine lines of customer prompts which are displayed when the dispenser does
not have a DPT installed. (Premier B only)

INSIGHT ™
A model of Tokheim Dispenser Payment Terminal that includes a graphic
display and a standard or graphic printer.

J(n)
Refers to a specific connector, numbered (n).

JU(n)
Refers to a specific jumper, numbered (n).

KEY ARMING
Key arming a dispenser requires a magnetic arming key to be placed on the
keyswitch area of the dispenser before a sale can occur. Key arming can be
used in both console operation and stand-alone operation. The arming key can
be used on both sides of a dispenser.

LCD
Liquid Crystal Display. Tokheim uses this technology for the dispenser
displays.

LEAK DETECTOR DELAY


Amount of time needed for the leak detector system to pressurize.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 11-5
Glossary L — N
LED
Light Emitting Diode. An electronic device that illuminates when the proper
signals are present.

LEVEL SECURITY CODES


Codes used in programming that allow access to information contained in
various areas of dispenser programming.

MANAGER KEY
A magnetic key which, when placed on the keyswitch area, is used to enter
the manager mode for programming the dispenser. The manager key color is
black.

MANAGER MODE
A mode of operation allowing the programming of configuration or setup data.

MAXIMUM DELIVERY
A programmed value that limits the maximum amount of fuel that can
dispensed in one sale.

MEMS
Modular Electronic Marketing System.

METER VOLUME
Amount of product that has passed through the meter.

MOP
Method of payment.

N.F.P.A.
National Fire Protection Agency.

NON-BLEND DISPENSER
Standard Model Premier dispenser with up to four straight grade products and
up to four hoses per side.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


11-6 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Glossary N — P

NO PULSE TIME-OUT
A programmed value that sets the maximum time allowed between pulses
after a sale has started. This function will terminate a sale if no pulses are
received during the set time out period.

OCTANE
A property of the fuel product controlling the burning rate. A figure of merit
representing the resistance of gasoline to premature detonation when exposed
to heat and pressure in the combustion chamber of an internal-combustion
engine.

OPERATING MODE
(See Run Mode)

OPERATOR INTERFACE KEYPAD


This keypad is used for data entry, starting and stopping the dispenser, and
manager mode programming.

PC, PCB
Printed Circuit Board.

PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
All equipment designed or adapted for use with the Tokheim Premier
dispensers, point-of-sale consoles, printers, etc.

PERMANENT ARMING
A programmable dispenser mode not requiring use of a key. The dispenser is
armed to allow a fuel sale as soon as it becomes idle. Permanent arming can
be used in both console operation and stand-alone operation.

P(n)
Product number ‘n’.

PPUV DISPLAY
Dispenser displays that show the price-per-unit-volume.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 11-7
Glossary P
PREMIER B
The Premier B series dispenser is one of the most technologically advanced
dispensers in the world. Premier B dispensers offer multi-hose configurations,
vapor recover, product blending, dispenser payment terminals for cash, credit,
debit, and fleet card fuel sales, large LCD displays that incorporate customer
instructions and dispenser diagnostics, and the most reliable meter in the
industry.

PREMIER C
The Premier C series dispenser is an enhancement to the Premier B series
dispenser. Enhancements include a 6-piece chassis, dual head cardreader,
draw style locks on lower doors, standardized raceway design, easier access
to components in the raceway, electronics enclosure and hydraulics cabinet,
and full ADA compliance.

PRESETS
Fuel sale in which the maximum money or volume amount is selected at the
dispenser or at the console before the sale begins. The dispenser
automatically stops dispensing the product when the preset value is reached.

PRODUCT SELECTION KEYPAD


A 1 x 5 keypad that the customer uses to select which fuel grade will be
dispensed from the hose.

PRODUCT SELECTION NUMBER


An assigned number (in Mode F28) that is used by the console to identify the
hose or product.

PROGRAMMING BUTTON
Any of the keypad buttons found on the Operator Interface keypad .

PROGRAMMING MODE
(See Manager's Mode)

PSI
Pounds per Square Inch. A unit of measure for pressure.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


11-8 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Glossary P — S

PULSES
Electrical impulses from dual-phase pulser that is used by the CPU board to
keep track of the volume dispensed.
Premier B: U.S.A. measurement: 1000 pulses = one gallon
Metric measurement: 250 pulses = 1 liter
Premier C: U.S.A. measurement: 400 pulses = one gallon
Metric measurement: 100 pulses = 1 liter

RAM
Random Access Memory. Temporary memory storage device.

REMOTE
Remote control of submerged pump. Pump is located within the product tank,
not in the dispenser.

R(n)
Resistor number ‘n’.

ROM
(See EPROM)

RS-485
An EIA (Electronic Industries Association) standard that defines a protocol
for serial data communications. Allows several devices to be connected to a
single cable, distributed over a wide area.

RUN MODE
Method of operation where fuel transactions take place (when you are not in
manager mode).

RXD
Receive data

SECURITY LEVELS
Levels of manager modes where a programmed code for restricting access to
those modes exist

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999 11-9
Glossary S
SHIFT TOTALS
Cumulative sales totals for the shift that are stored in memory.

SIDE A OR B
All programming of a Premier dispenser is done on side A. Side B is opposite
of side A.

SLOW FLOW
Dispenser mode in which the fast flow valve has closed while the slow flow
valve has remained open to provide a reduced rate of fuel flow.

SLOW FLOW OFFSET


The point near the end of a preset fuel sale in which the fueling point
automatically enters slow flow mode to prevent an overrun. Default = 0.2
gallon, or .6 liter.

SOFTWARE DATE CODE


The release date of the dispenser software installed. The date code can be
accessed in manager mode F99.

STAND-ALONE OPERATION
The mode of operation when the dispenser does not require interaction with
console to dispense product.

STORAGE TANK
Underground or above-ground tank used for storing product.

STRAIGHT PRODUCT
A non-blended product.

SUCTION PUMP
Pump is located in the dispenser and moves the product from the tanks by
suction.

SW(n)
Switch number ‘n’.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


11-10 Form 4817A Version 1.0 August 1999
Glossary T — U
TDS
Tokheim Debit System - provides secure debit transactions at the dispenser
when used with the Tokheim Encryption Device (TED).

TDS Plus
Tokheim Debit System Plus - the name of the original debit solution provided
by Tokheim that incorporates a secure pin pad at the dispenser.

TED
Tokheim Encryption Device – used with Tokheim Debit System (TDS) to
provide secure debit transactions.

TTC
Talk to Console communication signal.

TTD
Talk to Dispenser communication signal.

TP(n)
Test Point number ‘n’.

TRANSVERSE DISPENSER
Transverse dispenser models have their products arranged in a transverse
(reverse) order from side A to side B. The last two letters of the model
number identify a transverse left (TL) or a transverse right (TR) dispenser.
Programming for transverse operation is performed in Modes F23 and F29.

TS(n)
Thermostat number ‘n’.

TXD
Transmit data.

UDCB
Universal Dispenser Controller, originally designed for Premier B, but is also
used in Premier C series dispensers.

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 11-11
Glossary U – V
U.L.
Underwriter’s Laboratories.
U(n)
The designation given for an integrated circuit numbered ‘n’.

VAC, AC
Volts, Alternating Current

VBB
Battery backup voltage reading (no AC power).

VBAT
Battery voltage reading.

VDC
Volts, Direct Current

VIEW ONLY PARAMETER


A parameter in programming that cannot be changed, only viewed.

VREF
A reference voltage for the pulsers’ Op Amp circuit.

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual


11-12 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Index

Index
Symbols
Adjusting Contrast 8-12
110 VAC Transformer Pri 3-20 Adjustment, Contrast, DPT display board 7-36
220 VAC Transformer Pri 3-20 Alternative Manager/Arming Key 3-26
67 Interface Box 1-7, 5-15 Ambient Temperature 1-3
69 Interface Box 7-9 Arming
keyswitch area, Premier C 2-13, 2-15
A Arming Key 3-22, 3-23, 3-25, 5-2
ASR (Authorized Service Representative) 1-1, 9-1, 9-5
A Side 2-2, 2-3, 3-10, 3-19
A/L 9-4 B
A/L Adjust 9-11
AC B Side 2-3, 2-11, 3-10
Current Requirements 1-3 Backlit LCD Displays 1-4
Distribution Board Backup Buttons 5-4
Premier B & C 3-12 Basic Programming 5-3, 5-4, 5-5
Filter Connector 3-13 Battery
Input 3-12 Charge Voltage 3-7
Input Connector 3-14 charger set point jumper 3-6
Noise Filter 3-12 connection 2-17
Option 3-14 INSIGHT DPT 8-9
Power Switch 2-17 INSIGHT DPT 8-6
Spare Connector 3-14 low or disconnected 5-3
Switch 3-12 Power Down Switch 3-7
AC Distribution Battery Pack 3-2
Block Diagram connector 3-5
Premier B 4-16 Beeper 3-22, 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26
Wiring Diagram connector
Premier B 4-23 INSIGHT DPT 8-9
Premier C 4-37 Blend
Access Door Control solenoids 1-28
Premier C 2-12 Operational sequence 1-26, 1-27, 1-28
Premier C with Insight 2-14 Pulses 1-27
Accessing Regulator valve 1-26
Card Cage Valve assembly 1-26
Premier B 2-6, 2-7 Valve interface board 1-28
Premier C 2-17 Valve power supply 1-28
Circuit Boards Blend Control Board 3-2
MaxVac 2-10, 2-19 MaxVac Interface 3-17, 9-8, 9-9
Connection Box Premier B & C 3-17, 9-9
Premier B 2-11 Blend Valve Power 3-20
DPT Controller Boards Blender 3-19
Premier C 2-18 operational diagram
Electrical Components 2-1 electronic 1-20, 1-25
Hardware variable 1-20, 1-23
Premier C 2-16 Blending valve power supply
Options Overview 1-28
Premier B 2-8
Adjust Resistor
battery charger 3-6

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 Index-1
Index

Block Diagram Card Reader 2-4, 7-36, 8-22


AC Distribution Board, Premier B 4-16 Cleaning 8-22
InSight DPT 8-3 Cardreader 2-12, 2-14
Standard DPT with TDS 7-9 Cash Acceptor 2-4, 2-8, 2-12, 2-13, 2-15, 3-19
Board Access, Premier B 7-33, 7-34, 7-35
AC Distribution Board Cassette 7-32
Premier B & C 3-12 DIP switches 7-35
Blend Control Board Lock Assemblies 7-32, 7-33, 7-34, 7-35
MaxVac 9-6 Cash Out 3-20
Premier B & C 3-17, 9-9 Cash PPUV Display 2-4, 2-5
Circuit Boards Circuit Board Signal Flow Block Diagram
Premier B 2-8 Premier B 6-2
Premier C 2-17 Premier C 6-3
Display Board Circuit Boards. See Board
Premier B (beeper in electronics enclosure) 3-22 Circuit Breaker 3-12, 9-5
Premier B (beeper in raceway) 3-23 Circuit Breakers 3-18
Premier C 3-25 Clearing a Paper Jam
Expanded Computer Board Premier B - Graphic Printer 8-26
Premier B & C 3-8 Premier C - INSIGHT DPT Printer 8-29
Interface Code Histories 5-8, 5-9
Premier B & C 3-6 Coil Resistance 10-4
LED Board Coil Voltages 10-2, 10-3
Premier B 3-21 Coils 1-5, 10-1
Mini Motor Control Wiring Diagrams 10-5
MaxVac 9-13 Communication
Mother Board Connector 3-5
Premier B & C 3-3 Problems
Motor Control INSIGHT DPT 8-17, 8-18
MaxVac 9-11 Communication Rate Settings
Multiplex INSIGHT DPT 8-7
MaxVac 9-6, 9-7, 9-8 Communications 3-7
Premier B & C 3-10 Diagnostics Display 5-6
Options Power Supply Components
Premier B & C 3-19 INSIGHT DPT 8-2, 8-3
Orientation 3-2 MaxVac System 9-3
Power Supply Premier B
MaxVac 9-10 Electronics Enclosure 2-4, 2-5
Relay Board Premier C
Premier B & C 3-11 Electronics Enclosure 2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 2-15
Valve Interface Board Standard DPT 7-2
Premier B & C 3-18 Configurations, Handle and Pulser Connectors
Boards Intrinsically Safe Barrier Assembly 3-28
Valve interface board 1-28 Connection Box
Button, Control 2-8, 3-6, 3-7 Premier B 2-11
Premier C 2-20
C Connector and Test Point Locations, DPT 7-4
Calibrating Dispenser Meters 5-14 Connectors 3-22, 3-23, 3-25
Call Button 4-5, 4-6 Console Operation 1-6
CARB 9-4 Contrast
Card Cage Adjusting Display 8-12
Premier B 2-9 Adjusting DPT display board 7-36
Premier C 2-17 Control Button 2-8, 2-17, 3-6, 3-7, 5-5

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technincal Reference Manual


Index-2 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Index

Control Valves 1-5 Display 1-4


Controller Board adjusting contrast 8-12
Connectors 7-7 Back-Lights 3-12
Connectors Defined for Standard D 7-17 Board
INSIGHT DPT 8-4, 8-5, 8-8 Assembly 2-6
Standard DPT with TDS Plus 7-13 Premier C 3-25
Controller valve, blender 1-26 Premier B (beeper in electronics enclosure) 3-22
Conventions, used in this Manual 1-1 Premier B (beeper in raceway) 3-23
Counter, pulsers 1-27 Side A and Side B Connectors 3-5
CPU board program memory 5-13 Data Signals 3-6
CRC Code 5-13 Dialface 2-6
Credit PPUV Display 2-4 DPT 2-4, 2-13
Current Requirements 1-3 INSIGHT Debit 2-14
Customer Prompts Display Area 2-4 INSIGHT DPT 2-15
Money 2-4
D money/volume 2-12, 2-15
Darken Display. See Contrast, Adjusting Display PPUV 2-4
Date Code, Software 5-13 price per unit volume 2-13, 2-15
Debit DPT Problems
CPU Board LED's 7-17 INSIGHT 8-19
Product Selection Keypad 2-4 Wiring Diagram
Start Key 2-4 Premier B 4-22
Delivery Rate 1-5 Premier C 4-36
DHC 1-6, 1-7 DOCUMENT-on-DEMAND 1-2
Diagnostic Documents, related 1-2
codes 5-7 Door Lock
display communications 5-6 Premier C 2-16
Dual Flow Skinner Valves 10-1 DPT 1-3, 1-4, 1-6, 2-6, 3-19
Information 5-1 Beeper 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26
INSIGHT 7-18, 7-19, 7-20, 8-14, 8-15 Block Diagram 7-4
keypad 5-12 Card Reader Cleaning 7-36, 8-22
ROM CRC 5-13 Cash Acceptor Access 7-35
Diagram Communication Problems 8-17, 8-18
Signal Flow 6-2, 6-3 Communication Status 5-6
Diaphram Components 7-2
Regulator valve 1-26 Controller Board 7-5
DIP Switch 3-9 Address Settings 8-8
Expanded Computer Board 3-8 Board Connectors 8-9
Dispenser INSIGHT DPT 8-4, 8-5
Repair 6-2 Jumper and Switch Locations 7-5
Dispenser Configuration 1-10 Jumper Locations 8-4
Dispenser Electronics 1-3 Jumper Settings 8-6
Dispenser Error Codes 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8 Premier B 2-9
Dispenser flow rate check 9-4 Premier C 2-18
Dispenser Identification Status LEDs 8-5
Premier B 1-14, 1-15 SW1 Switch Settings 8-7
Premier C 1-16, 1-17, 1-18 Test Point Locations 8-4
Dispenser Options CPU Board 7-5, 7-9, 7-14, 7-15
H models 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 Diagnostics 7-21, 7-22, 7-23, 7-24, 7-25
I models 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 Dial Assembly
Dispenser Orientation 2-2, 2-3 H300B Series only 2-6
Display 2-4
Display Problems 8-19

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 Index-3
Index

DPT Fan Assembly 3-2, 3-12


Illustration 2-4, 2-12, 2-14 Fan Connector 3-13
Jumper Locations 7-10, 7-14 FAX-On-Demand 9-4
Keypad Keycodes 8-13 Features 1-6, 1-7, 1-8, 1-9
Light Emitting Diodes (LED) 7-8, 7-17, 8-5 Feed Button
Lights 3-12 Graphic printer 8-27
Operational Problems 8-20, 8-21 Filters 1-5
Out 3-20 Fluorescent backlit LCD Displays 1-4
Power Supply 3-2 Foundation Plans 1-2
Printer 2-8 Fuel Limitations 1-5
Clear Paper Jam 8-23 Full-Flow 10-2
Panel 2-4 Function Codes 5-10, 5-11
Problems. See troubleshooting
Specifications 7-26 G
Switch Locations 7-5, 7-10, 7-14 Gasboy DPT 7-2
Test Point Locations 7-4, 8-5 GASBOY ONLY, DPT SW1 7-6
Troubleshooting 7-21, 7-22, 7-23, 7-24, 7-25, Graphic DPT
8-17, 8-18, 8-19, 8-20, 8-21 Keypad Keycodes 8-13
with TDS 7-9 Graphic Mode 8-2
Dual flow 1-5 Graphic Printer 2-8, 8-23
Dual phase pulsers 1-4 Clear Paper Jam 8-23
Dual-Price 2-13, 2-15 Paper Specs. 8-23
E H
Electronic Blender Handle and Pulser Connectors Configurations
operational diagrams 1-20, 1-23, 1-25 Intrinsically Safe Barrier 3-28
overview 1-7 Heater 1-3, 3-2, 3-12
Electronics 1-3 Heater Connector 3-13
Electronics Enclosure Components HHHH 5-10
Premier B 2-4, 2-5 Histories 5-7, 5-8, 5-9
Premier C 2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 2-15 Hose Controllers 1-7
Entering Manager Modes 5-2 Humidity 1-3
EPROM 3-8
ERR05 5-3 I
Error
Codes 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8 In-line Connector 5-15
History 5-7, 5-8 Inlet solenoid 1-26, 1-28
Indicators 9-6, 9-7 Input Connector 3-24, 3-26
Message Handling & Troubleshooting Tips 6-1 Input Voltage, Wide Range Power Supply 1-4
Ethanol 1-5 INSIGHT
Exiting Manager Mode 5-2, 5-5 installing paper 8-1
Expanded Computer Board INSIGHT DPT 1-4, 8-9
DIP Switch 3-9 Battery Connection 8-9
Premier B & C 3-8 Beeper Connector 8-9
Expanded computer board 1-27 Block Diagram 8-3
Communication Problems 8-17, 8-18
F Communication Rate Settings 8-7
Components 8-2, 8-3
F02 5-4 Controller Board 8-4, 8-5, 8-8
F11 5-6 debit display, Premier C 2-14
F96 5-7, 5-8, 5-9 Diagnostics 7-18, 7-19, 7-20, 8-14, 8-15
F97 5-10, 5-11
F98 5-12

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technincal Reference Manual


Index-4 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Index

INSIGHT DPT Keypad


Display Problems 8-19 product selection, Premier B 2-4
DPT display, Premier C 2-15 product selection, Premier C 2-13, 2-15
Graphic Printer 8-23 remote 2-14
illustration, Premier B 2-5 Keypad Layout
illustration, Premier C 2-14 Softkey 8-13
installing paper Keypad Test 8-13
Graphic DPT, Premier B 8-23 Keyswitch
Premier C 8-28 Premier B 2-4
keypad function codes 5-11, 8-13 Premier C 2-13
Operational Problems 8-20, 8-21 Keyswitch area 5-2
INSIGHT DPT Controller Boards
L
Premier B 2-9
Premier C 2-18 LCD Displays 1-4
Installing Paper LED 3-8, 6-4, 7-8, 7-17
Premier B - Tear-Bar Printer 7-27 Board 3-21
Premier C - INSIGHT DPT Printer 8-28 Control 3-24
Premier C - Standard Printer 7-29 Expanded Computer Board 3-8
Installing Printer Paper Interface Board 3-6, 3-7
INSIGHT DPT, Premier C 8-28 Locations 8-5
Intercom Button Output 3-5 MaxVac 9-10, 9-11, 9-13
Intercom Speaker 1-7, 4-6 Lighten. See Contrast, Adjusting Display
Intercom Speaker Junction Box 4-5 Lighting, Spandrel 4-6
Interface Board 3-2, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 5-15 Lights and Heater 1-3
Premier B 2-8 Lights Connector 3-15
Premier B & C 3-6 Lock
Premier C 2-17 Premier C 2-16
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Assembly Lock assemblies, Cash Acceptor 7-32
Premier C 3-27, 3-28 Logic Sequence 6-2
Low Battery 3-7
J Low-Flow 10-2
J-Box 5-15
M
Jumper and Switch Locations
DPT Controller Board 7-5 Magnetic Key 5-2
for Standard DPT with TDS 7-10, 7-14 Magnetic Keyswitch Area 2-4
INSIGHT DPT 8-6 Main AC In 3-20
Jumpers Main AC Switch 3-12
Display Board 3-22, 3-23, 3-25 Main Lights Connector 3-15
Junction Box, Speaker 4-5 Manager
Key 2-13, 2-15, 3-22, 3-23, 3-25, 5-2, 5-4
K Mode 1-6, 3-9, 5-3, 9-5
Key Manager/Arming Key 3-24
Arming 3-22, 3-23, 3-25, 5-2 Manager’s Mode F02 5-4
Manager 3-22, 3-23, 3-25, 5-2 Manifolded 1-19
Keycodes 8-13 MaxVac 1-3
Keypad Blend Control Board
buttons 5-10, 5-12 MaxVac Interface 3-17, 9-8, 9-9
Connectors 3-22, 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26 Boards. See Board
diagnostics 5-12 Circuit Breakers 9-10
function code 5-10 Error Reset 9-5, 9-11, 9-13
operator interface 2-4, 2-13, 2-15 LED
product selection 2-6

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 Index-5
Index

MaxVac O
Mini Motor Control Board 9-13
Motor Control Board 9-11 Operating
Power Supply Board 9-10 Environment 1-3
Mini Motor Control Board 9-13 Mode 1-6
Motor Control Board 9-11, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14 Program 3-8
Multiplex Board 9-8 Temperature, wide range power supply 1-4
Nozzle/Vehicle Fill Pipe 9-3 Operational Diagrams 1-19, 1-20, 1-22, 1-23, 1-24,
Power Supply Board 9-10 1-25
System Components 9-3 1 or 2 Hose Manifolded Disp. (H424C-R) 1-19
Tests 9-4 Elect. Var. Blend, Transverse Disp. (424C-RB4TR)
Theory of Operation 9-1 1-23
Vapor Recovery System Components Elect. Var. Blend, Transverse Disp. (H424C-
Premier B 2-10 RB4TL) 1-23
Premier C 2-19 Electronic Blend Disp. (H426C-REB) 1-20
Mechanical Totalizers 1-5 Electronic Blend, Transverse Disp. (H426C-
Meter 1-5 REBTL) 1-25
Accuracy 1-5 Electronic Blend, Transverse Disp. (H426C-
Calibrating 5-14 REBTR) 1-25
Methanol 1-5 Electronic Var. Blend Disp. (H424C-RB3, B4, B5)
Method of Payment 2-15 1-20
Mirror 2-3 Manifolded, Transverse Disp. (H424C-RTL) 1-22
Mode F11 5-6 Manifolded, Transverse Disp. (H424C-RTR) 1-22
Mode F96 5-7, 5-8, 5-9 Multi-hose Disp. (H428C-R) 1-19
Mode F97 5-10, 5-11 Multi-hose, Transverse Disp. (H426C-RTL) 1-24
Mode F98 5-12 Multi-hose, Transverse Disp. (H426C-RTR) 1-24
Model Number Notation 1-11 Operational Problems
Premier B 1-8, 1-9, 1-10 INSIGHT DPT 8-20, 8-21
Model/Serial Number Plate 2-2 Operational sequence, blender valve 1-26, 1-27, 1-28
Money Display 1-4, 2-4, 3-22, 3-23 Operator Interface
Money/Volume 5-12 Keypad 2-4, 2-13, 2-15, 3-22, 3-23, 3-25
Money/Volume Display 2-12, 2-15 Keypad call button 4-5, 4-6
Mother Board 3-2 Keypad Connector 3-24, 3-26
Motor Circuit 3-10 Option Power Supply Connector 3-14
Motor Control Connector 3-4 Options, dispenser
Motor Control board, MaxVac H, I models 1-8, 1-9, 1-10
Premier B 2-10 Options Power Supply 2-17, 3-2
Premier C 2-19 Premier B & C 3-19
Motors, Suction 1-3 Orientation 2-2, 2-3
Multi-Hose 1-19, 1-24 System Boards 3-2
Multiplex Board 3-2, 3-11, 9-5, 9-6, 9-7, 9-8 Outlet solenoid 1-26, 1-28
Premier B & C 3-10 Outline Drawings 1-2
Output Current, Wide Range Power Supply 1-4
N Output Noise, Wide Range Power Supply 1-4
Overview
National Fire Protection Agency 2-1 Blender operational sequence 1-26, 1-27, 1-28
Native Mode 8-2 Valve interface board 1-28
Non-Graphic. See Native Mode
Non-Zero Sales 5-4 P
Nozzle
Sensors 3-10 Panel 2-6
Nozzle Boot Switches 5-10 Paper Jam
Number Correcting, Standard Printer 7-30
Serial 2-7, 2-9

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technincal Reference Manual


Index-6 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Index

Part No. Proportional Blend Valves 1-5


Graphic printer paper, Premier B 8-23 Pulser/Handle Connector 3-4
INSIGHT DPT Printer, Premier C 8-28 Pulsers 1-4, 1-27, 3-10
PASS 5-3 Pulses 1-27
Peripheral Devices 7-2 Pulses Per Gallon / Liter 1-4
Plate, Serial Number 2-7, 2-9
Positive Displacement Meter 1-5 Q
Power Requirements 1-3 Quick Entry Method 5-7
Power Supply Board
MaxVac 9-10 R
Power Supply board, MaxVac
Premier B 2-10 RAM 3-8
Power Supply, Options 3-2 Ratio Test. See A/L
Power Supply, Wide Range 1-4 Receipt Slot 2-4
Power Switch 2-7, 2-8, 2-17, 3-2, 3-18 Regulator valve 1-26, 1-28
PPUV 2-13, 2-15, 3-22, 3-23, 3-25, 5-12 Related Documents 1-2
Premier B Dispenser Identification 1-15 Relative humidity 1-3
Premier C Dispenser Identification 1-14, 1-16, 1-17, Relay
1-18 Board 3-2, 3-10, 3-11
Premier Specifications 1-3, 1-4, 1-5 Power 3-12
Price Displays 3-22, 3-23 Relay Power Connector 3-14
Primary Access Door 2-12, 2-14 Remote Keypad 2-14
Printer 2-6, 2-8, 2-12, 2-14 Removing the Cash Acceptor
Clearing a Paper Jam Premier B 7-33
Premier C - Standard Printer 7-30 Premier C 7-34
installing INSIGHT DPT paper 8-1 Requirements
Installing Paper Performance 1-5
Graphic Printer, Premier B 8-23 Power 1-3
Premier C 8-28 Resistance 10-4
Problems Retainer
MaxVac 9-5 Screws 2-8, 2-17
Problems, Communication. See Communication Problems: ROM CRC Diagnostic Test 5-13
INSIGHT RS-485 3-6
Problems, Display. See Display Problems: INSIGHT Run Mode 1-6, 5-14
Problems, Operational. See Operational Problems:
INSIGHT
S
Product 6 3-22, 3-23 Serial Number Plate 2-2, 2-7, 2-9
Product Lights Connector 3-15 Service Parts 7-29
Product Number Assignments 2-3 Service Parts Division 8-22, 8-28
Product Selection Keypad 2-4, 2-6, 2-13, 2-15, Side
3-22, 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26 A 2-2, 3-10, 3-19
Products 4, 3, 2, and 1 3-4 B 2-11, 3-10
Programming Signal Flow Diagram 6-2, 6-3
backup buttons 5-4 Single-Price 2-13, 2-15
basic programming 5-4 Softkey Keypad Layout 8-13
changing parameter information 5-3 Softkeys 2-15
entering manager modes 5-3 Softkeys, Illustrations 5-11, 8-13
exiting manager modes 5-5 Software Date Code 5-13
illustration of display 5-4 Solenoids 1-26, 1-28
manager key 5-4 Solid State Relays 3-11
moving from one mode to the next 5-3 Solution Center 6-1
quick entry method 5-7 Spandrel Lighting 1-3, 4-6
saving manager mode settings 5-5
TDS Plus 5-4
Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation
Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 Index-7
Index

Speaker 1-7 Test


Speaker Junction Box 3-5, 4-5 Keypad Buttons 5-12
Specifications 1-3, 1-4, 1-5 Keypads 5-10
Specifications, Thermal Paper 7-29, 8-28 MaxVac System 9-4
Stand-alone Operation 1-6 Test Points 3-7, 3-8, 7-4
Standard DPT 7-2, 7-3 Descriptions 8-5
Standard DPT with TDS Header 3-6
Block Diagram 7-9 Locations 8-5
Start Up / Battery Power Down Switch 3-7 Testing Console Communication 5-14
Start Up Switch 3-6, 3-7 Tests. See also Diagnostics: DPT
State History 5-7, 5-8 Thermal Paper Specifications 7-29, 8-28
Static Pressure Decay Test 9-4 Thermostats 3-12
Static Strap 2-17, 3-1 Tokheim Customer Service 6-1
Strainer Screen 1-5 Totalizers 1-5
Suction Motors 1-3 Transformer
Surge Protection Connector 3-13 DPT 3-2
Surge/Spike Protection 3-12 Input Connector 3-4
SW1 3-7, 7-7, 7-10, 7-15 Pri 3-20
Expanded Computer Board 3-8, 3-9 Sec 3-20
INSIGHT DPT, Switch Settings 8-7 UDCB 3-2
Interface Board 3-6 Transverse 2-3
SW2 8-6, 9-7 Transverse Dispenser Configurations 1-21
Switch Product Locations 1-21
DIP 3-9 Totalizer Locations 1-21
Power 3-2, 3-18 Transverse Dispenser Identification 1-17
Switch, Power 2-7, 2-8, 2-17 Troubleshooting 6-1
Switch Settings 7-6, 7-15 DPT 7-21, 7-22, 7-23, 7-24, 7-25
System DPT Communication Problems 8-17, 8-18
Ground 3-6 DPT Display Problems 8-19
System Boards. See Board DPT Operational Problems 8-20, 8-21
System Overview 1-29 MaxVac System 9-5
TTC 3-6, 5-14
T TTD 3-6, 5-14, 5-15
Talk To U
Console 5-14
Dispenser 5-14 Unit Price Display 1-4
TCSA 3-10
TDS 2-5, 2-14, 7-9, 7-11 V
TDS and TED Connections 7-11 Vacuum 9-1
TDS Plus 7-13 Valance Lights 3-14
TDS Plus Programming 5-4 Valance Lights Connector 3-15
TED 7-9 Valve
troubleshooting 7-26 AC Input Connector 3-4
TED unit 7-9, 7-11 Circuit 3-10
Temperature 1-3 Control 3-11
Terminal Block Signals Control Connectors 3-4
Premier B 2-11 Flow Control 1-5
Premier C 2-20 Interface Board 3-2, 3-18
Termination Code 5-8, 5-9 Power 3-18
Termination Code History 5-7 signals 3-18
Valve interface board 1-28
Vapor system visual check 9-4
Vapors 9-1, 9-3
Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technincal Reference Manual
Index-8 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
Index

Variable Blender Wiring Diagram


operational diagram 1-20, 1-23 Options Power Supply (Premier B) 4-24
overview 1-7 Pump Handles and Pulsers (Premier B) 4-19
Vault, cash acceptor 7-32 Pump Handles and Pulsers - H428B-S (Premier B)
Volt Transformer Connector 3-13 4-18
Voltage, Battery Charge 3-7 Solenoid Coils 10-5
Voltages 10-2, 10-3 Spandrel Lighting Wiring (Premier C) 4-6
Volume Display 1-4, 3-22, 3-23 Standard DPT (Premier C) 4-39
Premier B 2-4, 2-5 System Wiring Diagram (Premier C) 4-32
Premier C 2-12, 2-15 Wiring Diagrams 1-2

W
Warnings 2-8, 2-17
Warranty 1-1
Watchdog Reset Counter 5-6
Wide Range Power Supply 1-4
Wiring Diagram
AC Distribution (Premier B) 4-23
AC Distribution (Premier C ) 4-37
AC Distribution Block Diagram (Premier B) 4-16
Debit DPT (Premier C ) 4-40
Displays (Premier B) 4-22
Displays (Premier C ) 4-36
DPT (Premier B) 4-25
Electronics Block Diagram (Premier B) 4-8
Electronics Block Diagram (Premier C) 4-7
H311B-R, H322B-R & H324B-R (Premier B) 4-11
H311B-S, H312B-S, H322B-S & H324B-S
(Premier B) 4-4
H322B-B3/B5 (Premier B) 4-15
H324B INSIGHT DPT (Premier B) 4-26
H413B-R (Premier B) 4-9
H413B-REB (Premier B) 4-13
H426-REB INSIGHT DPT (Premier B) 4-28
H426B INSIGHT DPT (Premier B) 4-27
H426B-R (Premier B) 4-10
H426B-REB (Premier B) 4-14
H426B-S (Premier B) 4-2
H428B-R (Premier B) 4-12
H428B-R INSIGHT DPT (Premier B) 4-29
H428B-S (Premier B) 4-3
INSIGHT DPT (Premier C ) 4-41
Intercom Speaker Wiring (Premier B) 4-5
Intercom/Speaker Wiring (Premier C) 4-6
Intrinsically Safe Barrier Board
Premier C - H 400 Series 4-34, 4-35
Premier C - H300 Series 4-33
MaxVac System, for Blending Dispensers 4-31
MaxVac System, for Non-Blend Dispensers 4-30
MaxVac Vapor Recovery (Premier C ) 4-38
Mother Board (Premier B) 4-17
Motors and Valves (Premier B) 4-21
Motors and Valves - H428B-S (Premier B) 4-20

Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technical Reference Manual Tokheim Corporation


Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00 Index-9
Index

Tokheim Corporation Premier B & C Series Dispensers Technincal Reference Manual


Index-10 Form 4817A Version 2.0 August 1999 Rev. 05/05/00
R

USER’S COMMENT AND EVALUATION FORM


MANUAL : ___________________________________________________

FORM NUMBER : _________________

We appreciate your comments and evaluation (both favorable and unfavorable) of this manual.

1. This manual was easy to follow. YES_____ NO_____

2. The information was easy to understand. YES_____ NO_____

3. Section _____ of this manual was the MOST helpful. (briefly state why)
______________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________

4. Section _____ of this manual was the LEAST helpful. (briefly state why)
______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________

5. What errors, if any, did you find? (Please identify by page number)
Page#:_____Error:___________________________________________________________________
Page#:_____Error:___________________________________________________________________
Page#:_____Error:___________________________________________________________________
Page#:_____Error:___________________________________________________________________

Suggestions for Improvements or Additional Comments:


______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________

Date: ______________________________________
Name: _____________________________________ Please send to:
Title: _____________________________________
Technical Publications
Company: __________________________________ Tokheim Corporation
PO Box 360
Fort Wayne, IN 46897-1028
FOLD HERE

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL


FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 41 FORT WAYNE IN

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
TOKHEIM CORPORATION
PO BOX 360
FORT WAYNE IN 46897-1028

FOLD HERE
For technical questions, please contact:
Tokheim Solution Center
Ph: 800-866-6762
or
Fax: 219-470-4644

For service parts, please contact:


Service Parts Department
Ph: 219-470-4710
or
Fax: 800-866-1999

TOKHEIM CORPORATION
PO BOX 360
FORT WAYNE IN 46801

You might also like